636199106269154884

Order Specification Manual
www.automotionconveyors.com
Gravity Conveyor
Application and Technical Data
- NON PUBLIC INFORMATION Copyright 2011, an unpublished work by Automotion, Inc. All rights reserved. This material contains confidential information that is the property of
Automotion, Inc. Any unauthorized use, duplication, or disclosure, is prohibited by law. This document and/or drawings and the information
contained therein, are the sole and exclusive property of Automotion, Inc. In consideration of the disclosure being made of this non-public
information by Automotion, Inc. the recipient agrees that neither this document and/or drawings nor any information contained therein will be
copied, disseminated, or made available to any other person or entity without the prior written consent of Automotion, Inc.
Section 1:
(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
Theory of Operation:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
Overall Operation and Usage: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
Typical Applications: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
Capabilities: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Sub-Classes of Gravity Conveyor: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

Sub-Class 1:
Sub-Class 2:
Sub-Class 3:
Sub-Class 4:
Roller Gravity Conveyor (RG) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4

Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (GW) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Gravity Ball Transfer Tables (GB)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Gravity Slides & Chutes (GS) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
Application Guidelines:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Technical Data: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Section 1:

Page 2
December, 11
Theory of Operation:
Overall Operation and Usage:
Basic Gravity Conveyor consists of a conveyor frame with a
roller, wheel, or a solid bed. Gravity Conveyor is not powered;
therefore, human power or the force of gravity must propel the
product load.
When pitched downward, the product is
conveyed on the carrying surface by gravity propelling it down
the conveyor section. Although it is not powered, Gravity
Conveyor may incorporate any of several powered devices,
such as air brakes to help control its flow. Gravity conveyors
are widely used in unit handling systems because of their
simplicity, economy, and ease of maintenance. Although less
expensive than power conveyor, gravity lacks the positive flow
and control of powered conveyor.
Gravity Conveyor can be used with any product load that has a
flat, firm, riding surface and is free of protrusions that could
hinder the product load from traveling over the rollers.
Typical Applications:
The typical applications for Gravity conveyor are:
Transportation:
Installed on a slight slope to use the power of gravity to move product from point A to point B.
Accumulation:
To accumulate and stage cartons between two different operational functions. Cartons on gravity conveyor
installed on level surfaces must be manually pushed along to final destination or to the next powered
conveyor downstream.
Buffer:
Gravity Roller Conveyor is often used prior to manually operated equipment such as case fill or tape
machines. Used in conjunction with a manual or pneumatic case stop, the operator can control the flow to the
case fill or tape machine without the dangers of line pressure impeding the safety of the operator or the
performance of the auxiliary equipment.
Workstation
Used as a workstation for packing, checking, or assembly operations. Work is performed without having to
move or lift the product. Product is then easily moved downstream for further disposition.
Directional Changes
Curves, spur curves, junctions, and ball transfer tables are used to change the directional flow of cartons on a
gravity conveyor line. Gravity Wheel Conveyor will provide better tracking of product through turns.
Elevation Changes (Decline Only)

Used when transporting product from a higher elevation to a lower elevation, such as skatewheel gravity
junctions from sorters on shipping down lines.
Product Storage and Queuing (Order Picking)

Installed adjacent to a powered take-away line in a pick module. Referred to as flanking gravity, it gets
attached to the center take-away with a gap plate so completed orders are easily pushed onto the center
take-away lane and routed further downstream to the next pick module or inspection area
Section 1:

Page 3
December, 11
Capabilities:
Horizontal Gravity Conveyor is typically used for order picking or when buffering manually operated equipment or an
assembly operation from a powered conveyor. A gravity flow system is a typical application for gravity conveyor
pitched in a decline.
Sub-Classes of Gravity Conveyor:

Sub-Class 1: Roller Gravity Conveyor (RG)
The most common type of gravity conveyor is roller gravity. The frame is constructed from two side rails connected
by spreader channels or weld angles. The carrying rollers are mounted into hex holes punched in the side rails.
Gravity curves incorporate tapered rollers to facilitate a smooth transition at the direction change.
O
FL
FLOW
Roller Gravity Straight Conveyor
Roller Gravity Flow Rail

Gravity flow rail is constructed in much the same
manner as standard gravity conveyor. It consists of a
single row of narrow rollers between two side frames.
TAPERED ROLLER
Roller Gravity Curve with Tapered Rollers
ANTI-BACK UP
SAFETY LATCH
END STOP
Sub-Class 2: Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (GW)

Gravity wheel flow rail consists of a row of single wheels between two side frames. Also available with two rows of wheels
between the two side frames. Each wheel is offset to allow them to alternately overlap to minimize the possibility of cartons
catching on the valley between the two wheels.
ANTI-BACK UP
SAFETY LATCH
END STOP
Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (single row)
Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (double row)
Section 1:

Page 4
December, 11
Sub-Class 3: Gravity Ball Transfer Tables (GB)

Each individual ball is encased in its own collar assembly. The collars are held in place on the table by a KEP nut.
The rows of balls are staggered and are available in various center-to-center dimensions to provide a denser carrying
surface.
BALL TRANSFER
Sub-Class 4: Gravity Slides & Chutes (GS)

Gravity slides and chutes are constructed from 12-gauge black steel to provide a durable yet slick surface. Slides can
be formed into simple bed sections with 3-1/2 deep trough or pie shapes to maximize control of the product load as it
is transported.
FLOW
ENTRY TRANSITION PLATE
Gravity Trough Chute
TRANSITION PLATE
Slide to Roller Gravity Connection
Section 1:

Page 5
December, 11
Application Guidelines:
Conveyable Items: In general, any item with a bottom surface that is flat, continuous and rigid can be
conveyed on a Gravity Roller, Wheel, or Ball Transfer Conveyor. This includes such items as cartons, cases,
totes, pans, trays, etc. In addition to the above, gravity chutes may also be used to convey bags or other bulk
product as long as they do not transfer product onto a live roller or gravity roller or wheel conveyor.
The factors that limit the use of gravity conveyors are generally related to the application and how the product
load must be handled. Examples on the limitations of gravity conveyor is certain applications are:
1. Cartons containing fragile products require analysis of the degree of gravity flow that can be
utilized.
2. Pitched gravity conveyor should not be used for work-in-process applications where product may
be damaged if it bumps the preceding product. Level gravity conveyor may be used if proper care
is taken during the handling of the product.
3. Heavy unit loads should not be conveyed long distances by gravity flow unless air brakes or other
speed control device is used to retard the speed of the product.
4. Tapered totes require special consideration when being conveyed on gravity conveyor due to the
chance of the load shingling. Shingling is caused by the accumulation and line pressure of
empties, long lines and steep pitches.
Minimum Product Length:

6 long on 2 carrying roller centers.
Item Weight:
Gravity Conveyor will convey product up to 130 lbs./ft
Minimum Top of Roller:

Minimum distance from the floor to the top of roller is:
RG (2 1/2 deep frame) 2 3/4
RG (3 1/2 deep frame) -3 3/4
Note: Minimum top of roller assumes frames are resting on floor.
Roller and Wheel Spacing: Product carried on Roller Gravity and Wheel Gravity Conveyor should be supported by
at least 3 rollers (3 axles for Gravity Wheel Conveyor) at all times. In situations where the bottom of the product load
is not rigid the contents within the package may cause the load to sag between the carrying rollers. Adjust roller
centers accordingly to accommodate product to be conveyed.
L = Length of Package
La = Length of Article inside of Package
Lc = Roller Centers Required to Minimize or
Reduce sagging
Gravity curves utilize tapered rollers, which provides optimum differential action and maintains product orientation.
When gravity curves are used, care should be taken that the product to be conveyed is stable at the outside of the
curve where distance between roller centers becomes greater.
Section 1:

Page 6
December, 11
Product Flow: Gravity conveyors will only flow in the direction they are pitched. Product on horizontal gravity
conveyor may be manually moved forward or backward.
Horizontal/ Decline Operation: Gravity Conveyor is designed to operate as a horizontal conveyor or as

pitched decline conveyor, such as a junction, off of a sorter with a slight downward pitch.
Frame Selection: Gravity conveyor is available in 2 1/2 and 3 1/2 deep side frames.
Line Pressure: Line pressure developed on a backed-up Gravity Conveyor being fed by a powered conveyor
may cause product loads to shift and jam. Care should be taken to avoid this.
Environmental Conditions: Gravity Roller and Gravity Wheel Conveyor are designed to operate within the
normal temperature and atmospheric conditions found in plants and warehouses. Several conditions to watch
for include:
High Temperatures
Do not use a Gravity Roller or Gravity Wheel Conveyor in an application where the ambient temperature
exceeds 130F. All of the components are within safe operating limits up to this temperature.
Low Temperatures
Do not use a Gravity Roller or Gravity Wheel Conveyor in applications where the ambient temperature falls
below 40F.
Wash Down Conditions
Gravity Roller or Gravity Wheel Conveyor may be modified for use in wash down applications. Refer to the
Automotions Engineering Department for further details on wash down applications.
Determining System Width: An important factor in conveyor layout design is the products ability to negotiate a
curved conveyor section. Typically, it is preferred to have the product maintain its original orientation through
the curve. The following formula is used to determine the necessary conveyor width a product requires to
travel through a curve while still maintaining 2 of clearance through the turn.
Section 1:

Page 7
December, 11
Determining Gravity Conveyor Pitch: Correctly pitched conveyor will greatly enhance the effectiveness and the
reliability of a conveyor system. For suggested pitches in gravity conveyor use the following Chart:
Chart : Gravity Pitch Selection
Product Being Conveyed
Approx.
Gravity Roller Conv.

Plain & Dust-Tight
Bearings
Gravity Roller Conv.

Pres. Lubricated
Bearings.
Gravity Wheel Conv.

Or
Live Rail Conv.
Cont.
Pitch Per Ft.
Pitch Per 10-0 Section
Pitch Per 90 Curve
Weight
1/Ft.
10-0
90
1/Ft.
10-0
90
1/Ft.
10-0
90
Carton (Fiber Smooth Bottom)
10#
5/8
6 1/4
3/8
3 3/4
20#
1/2
1/4
2 1/2
3 1/2
45#
3/8
3 3/4
3 1/2
3/4
7 1/2
3/16
1 7/8
100#
1/4
2 1/2
5/8
6 1/4
3/16
1 7/8
Wood Cases or Boxes
5#
5/8
6 1/4
3/8
3 3/4
Wood Cases or Boxes
10#
3/8
3 3/4
3/4
7 1/2
1/4
2 1/2
Wood Cases or Boxes
25#
1/4
2 1/2
5/8
6 1/4
1/4
2 1/2
Wood Cases or Boxes
50#
3/16
1 7/8
1/2
1/4
2 1/2
3 1/2
Wood Cases or Boxes
100#
3/16
1 7/8
3/8
3 3/4
3 3/4
1/8
1 1/4
2 1/2
Metal & Fiber Glass Tote

Boxes
10#
1/2
3/8
3 3/4

Boxes
25#
3/8
3 3/4
3/4
7 1/2
1/4
2 1/2
3 1/2

Boxes
50#
1/4
2 1/2
5/8
6 1/4
3/16
1 7/8
Multi-Wall Bags (Firm)
50#
5/8
6 1/4
Multi-Wall Bags (Firm)
100#
1/2
Section 1:

Page 8
December, 11
Technical Data:
Conveyor Widths: Standard gravity conveyors are available in standard widths (nominal overall widths) of 18,
24, 30, and 36. It is recommended that the conveyor width be greater than the widest item to be conveyed.
Tight radius gravity conveyors are only available in standard widths of 18, 24 and 30.
Roller Centers: Gravity roller conveyors are available with the carrying rollers located on 3 or 4 centers on
standard conveyor and 2 centers on units with dense pack rollers.
Frame:
Gravity Roller: Formed 2 1/2 x 12 Ga. or 3 1/2 x 10 Ga. galvanized side channel and 2 x 1-1/8 x
10 Ga. cross member, the side channel is punched to accept a 7/16 hex roller axle.
Gravity Wheel Flow Rail: Formed 2 1/2 x 15/16 x 12 Ga. galvanized side channel.
Carrying Rollers:
2-1/2 Frame: 1-3/8 diameter x 18 ga. with 1/4 round spring-loaded axles with semi-precision
grease packed bearings.
3-1/2 Frame: 1-7/8 diameter x 16 ga. tube with 7/16 hex spring-loaded axles with semi-precision
greased packed bearings.
Tapered Carrying Rollers: 1-3/8 Diameter (small end) with 7/16 hex spring-loaded axles with semi-precision
grease packed bearings.
Note: Tapered carrying rollers in standard curves are true tapered rollers. Tapered carrying rollers in tight radius curves
are non-true taper.
Section 1:

Page 9
December, 11
Gravity Conveyor
Figures
Section 2:

Figures
Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
Figure Listing:............................................................................................................................. 3
Fig 101: 30 Degree True Taper Gravity Curve .......................................................................... 4
Fig 106: 90 Degree Tight Radius Gravity Curve....................................................................... 8
Fig 108: 45 Degree Gravity Junction......................................................................................... 9
Fig 109: 45 Degree Gravity Junction....................................................................................... 10
Fig 112: Gravity Straight Bed .................................................................................................. 11
Fig 113: Gravity Straight Brake Bed with Sensor Rollers ..................................................... 12
Fig 114: Gravity Straight Brake Bed........................................................................................ 13
Fig 115: Gravity Gate................................................................................................................ 14
Fig 116: Ball Transfer Table..................................................................................................... 15
Fig 120: Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (Single Row)...................................................................... 16
Fig 121: Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (Double Row Staggered) .................................................. 17
Fig 123: Gravity Roller Flow Rail............................................................................................. 18
Fig 130: Gravity Pie Chute ....................................................................................................... 19
Fig 131: Gravity Straight Chute ............................................................................................... 20
Fig 132: Gravity Trough Chute ................................................................................................ 21
Section 2:

Figures
Page 2
December, 11
Figure Listing:
Section 2:

Figures
Page 3
December, 11
Fig 101: 30 Degree True Taper Gravity Curve

Components:
Bed Section: 3 1/2 deep x
1 3/8 flange x 10 gauge
channel,
bolted
frame
construction.
Rollers: 1 7/8 diameter, 16 ga.
galvanized, carrying rollers
with plastic tapered sleeves
and 7/16 hex axle on nominal
3 roller centers.
Recommended Support
Locations (Approx.)
Standard Support
NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH + 1 4"
5/16"
3-1/2"
30
30" RADIUS
Notes:
1. Gap roller kit required for systems with 2 roller centers or when splicing two curves together.
2. All carrying rollers contain oiled bearings standard.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 2:
Figure
101

Figures
Conveyor Class
GV
Width
Gap Roller Kit
18
24
30
36
Y
N
*See Note 1
Page 4
December, 11

Components:
Bed Section: 3 1/2 deep x 1 3/8
flange x 10 gauge channel,
bolted frame construction.
galvanized, carrying rollers with
plastic tapered sleeves and
7/16 hex axle on nominal 3
roller centers.
Recommended Support
Locations (Approx.)
Standard Support
5/16"
3-1/2"
45
30" RADIUS
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 2:
Figure
102

Figures
Conveyor Class
GV
Width
Gap Roller Kit
18
24
30
36
Y
N
*See Note 1
Page 5
December, 11

Components:
roller centers.
Recommended Support
Locations (Approx.)
Standard Support
Single Leg Support
5/16"
3-1/2"
60
30" RADIUS
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 2:
Figure
103

Figures
Conveyor Class
GV
Width
Gap Roller Kit
18
24
30
36
Y
N
*See Note 1
Page 6
December, 11

Components:
roller centers.
FL
OW
Recommended Support
Locations (Approx.)
Standard Support
Single Leg Support
5/16"
3-1/2"
90
30" RADIUS
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 2:
Figure
104

Figures
Conveyor Class
GV
Width
Gap Roller Kit
18
24
30
36
Y
N
*See Note 1
Page 7
December, 11
Fig 106: 90 Degree Tight Radius Gravity Curve

Components:
roller centers.
FL
OW
Recommended Support
Locations (Approx.)
Standard Support
Single Leg Support
NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH + 1/4"
5/16"
3-1/2"
90
13-1/2" RADIUS
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carrying rollers are not true tapered.

This curve is unavailable in 36 nominal width.
Gap roller kit required for systems with 2 roller centers or when splicing two curves together.
All carrying rollers contain oiled bearings standard.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 2:
Figure
106

Figures
Conveyor Class
GV
Width
Gap Roller Kit
18
24
30
Y
N
*See Note 1
Page 8
December, 11
Fig 108: 45 Degree Gravity Junction

Components:
roller centers.
45
Recommended Support
Locations (Approx.)
12"
Standard Support
5/16"
FLOW
12"
12" ONLY
3-1/2"
Notes:
1. Available in 3 roller centers only.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
108
Conveyor Class
GV
Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Roller Center
3
Assembly Hand
L
R
Page 9
December, 11
Fig 109: 45 Degree Gravity Junction

Components:
roller centers.
60
Recommended Support
Locations (Approx.)
12"
12"
Standard Support
FLOW
5/16"
12" ONLY
3-1/2"
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
109
Conveyor Class
GV
Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Roller Center
3
Assembly Hand
L
R
Page 10
December, 11
Fig 112: Gravity Straight Bed

Components:
Bed Section (Medium Duty):
3 1/2 deep x 1 3/8 flange x 10
gauge channel, bolted frame
construction.
Bed Section (Light Duty):
2 1/2 deep x 1 flange x 12
gauge channel, bolted frame
construction.
Rollers (Medium Duty): 1 7/8
diameter, 16 ga. galvanized,
carrying rollers with 7/16 hex
axle.
Rollers (Light Duty): 1 3/8
diameter, 18 ga. galvanized,
carrying rollers with 1/4 round
axle.
NOM. CONVEYOR WIDTH - 2 1/2"
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
5/16"
3-1/2"
3 1 2" Deep Medium Duty

NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH
1/4"
NOM. CONVEYOR WIDTH - 2"
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
2-1/2"
2 1 2" Deep Light Duty
Notes:
1. Medium duty (3 1/2 deep frame) available in roller center increments between 12 and 120. Specify in
inches.
2. Light duty (2 1/2 deep frame) available in 12 increments between 12 and 120. Specify in inches.
3. Light duty (2 1/2 deep frame) is available in 18 & 24 widths only.
4. Chute transition plate is only available on medium duty (3 1/2 deep frame). Minimum bed length of 36
required.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
112
Conveyor Class
GV
Frame Depth
2 1/2
3 1/2
Section 2:

Figures
Nominal
3
Width
18
24
30
36
Bed Length
1-2
Roller
Center
Chute Transition
Plate
2
3
4
Y
N
(3 1/2 deep
frame only)
Page 11
December, 11
Fig 113: Gravity Straight Brake Bed with Sensor Rollers

120"
10 1/2"
3"
39" REF. (SEE NOTE)
54"
3" ROLLER CENTERS SHOWN
SENSOR
ROLLER
FLOW
5/16"
3 1/2"
2 1/2"
1 3 /8"
Notes:
1. Sensor roller may be relocated to accommodate various control
applications. Requires 25 psi to operate.
Components:
7/16 hex axle.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
113
Conveyor Class
GV
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
120
Roller Center
Brake
Control
Coated Rollers
Over Brake
2
3
4
GAB-6
GAB-11
None
Y
N
Page 12
December, 11
Fig 114: Gravity Straight Brake Bed

120"
13 1/2"
52 1/2"
54"
ROLLER CENTERS
FLOW
5/16"
3 1/2"
2 1/2"
1 3/8"
Notes:
1. Refer to Gravity Application and Technical Data section for detailed
specifications regarding brake control.
2. Requires 25 psi to operate.
Components:
Bed Section: 3 1/2 deep x 1 3/8"
7/16 hex axle.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
114
Conveyor Class
GV
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
120
Roller Center
2
3
4
Brake
Control
Coated Rollers
Over Brake
GAB-9
None
Y
N
Page 13
December, 11
Fig 115: Gravity Gate
SAFETY LATCH
SWING UP 95
3" TYP.
1 1/2"
3 1/2"
3 11/16"
3 1/2"
Nominal 30" walk thru for 36" gate

36" gate with 3" roller centers shown
OVERALL BED LENGTH + 1" BETWEEN BEDS
Notes:
1. Gravity gate for use with AutoRoll (AR) style conveyor is available with
3 roller centers only.
2. Includes striker plate, hinge kit, and spring kit.
Components:
7/16 hex axle.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 2:
Figure
115
Conveyor
Class
GV
Nominal
Width
Nominal Gate
Length
Overall Bed
Length
Roller Center
18
24
30
36
36
48
60
48
60
72
2
3
4

Figures
Infeed
Conveyor
Discharge
Conveyor
Proximity
Switch Kit
LR
VB
BC
GV
LS
AR (LIF)
AR (HIF)
LR
VB
BC
GV
LS
AR (LIF)
AR (HIF)
120V AC
24V AC
None
Page 14
December, 11
Fig 116: Ball Transfer Table

Components:
Bed Section:
gauge channel construction.
Transfer Balls:
1 diameter carbon steel ball
encased in individual collar,
fastened to a 12 ga. frame
SQUARE PATTERN
STAGGERED PATTERN
SQ
ST
SQ
SPECIFY LENGTH
ST
1 3/8"
3 1/2"
Notes:
NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH +
8"
4 7/8"
Balls per feet:

Width
2 Sq.
3 Sq.
4 Sq.
1 1/2 Staggered
2 Staggered
3 Staggered
18
54
24
15
48
27
12
24
72
32
18
64
36
16
30
90
40
25
80
44
20
36
108
48
27
96
54
24
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 2:
Figure
116
Conveyor Class
GV

Figures
Nominal Width
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
24
36
48
60
Ball Pattern
2 square
3 square
4 square
1 1/2 staggered
2 staggered
3 staggered
Page 15
December, 11
Fig 120: Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (Single Row)

Components:
Bed Section:
2 1/2 deep x 1 5/16 flange x
12 gauge side channel.
Wheels:
1 15/16 diameter skatewheels
with 1/4 diameter axle on 2
centers.
2-11/16"
SPECIFY LENGTH
15/16"
2-1/2"
2" WHEEL CENTERS
2.4 NOM.
FLOW
2 1/2"
3/8"
2 1/2"
Anti Back-Up Safety Latch

(Optional)
1 1/2"
End Stop (Optional)

FLOW RAIL WITH PITCHED SUPPORTS
(MOUNT PERPINDICULAR)
FLOW RAIL WITH LEVEL SUPPORTS

(MOUNT PARALLEL)
Notes:
1. Floor supports designed for 102 or 120 beds only (order separately). For additional lengths, special order is
required.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 2:
Figure
120
Conveyor Class
GV

Figures
Length
End Stop
Anti-Backup Safety Latch
102
120
Y
N
Y
N
Page 16
December, 11
Fig 121: Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (Double Row Staggered)

Components:
Bed Section:
2 1/2 deep x 1 5/16 flange x
12 gauge side channel.
Wheels:
1 15/16 diameter skatewheels
with 1/4 diameter axle on 1 1/2
centers.
3-1/2"
SPECIFY LENGTH
15/16"
2-1/2"
1 1/2" WHEEL CENTERS
2.4 NOM.
FLOW
2 1/2"
3/8"
2 1/2"
Anti Back-Up Safety Latch
(Optional)
1 1/2"
End Stop (Optional)
FLOW RAIL WITH PITCHED SUPPORTS

(MOUNT PERPINDICULAR)
FLOW RAIL WITH LEVEL SUPPORTS

(MOUNT PARALLEL)
Notes:
1. Floor supports designed for 102 or 120 beds only (order separately). For additional lengths, special order is
required.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 2:
Figure
121
Conveyor Class
GV

Figures
Length
End Stop
Anti-Backup Safety Latch
102
120
Y
N
Y
N
Page 17
December, 11
Fig 123: Gravity Roller Flow Rail

Components:
Bed Section:
gauge side channel, bolted
frame construction.
Rollers:
1 7/8
diameter
16
ga.
galvanized, carrying roller with
7/16 hex axle.
SPECIFY LENGTH
6"
3" ROLLER CENTERS SHOWN
5 1/4"
FLOW
3/8"
5"
3 1/2"
Notes:
1. Bed length available in 12 increments between 12 and 120. Specify in inches.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
123
Conveyor Class
GV
Length
Roller Centers
2
3
4
6
Section 2:

Figures
Page 18
December, 11
Fig 130: Gravity Pie Chute

Components:
Frame:
3 1/2 deep x 12 gauge formed
chute with bolt-on formed 12
gauge channel spreaders.
SYSTEM CONVEYOR WIDTH + 29 5/8"
SYSTEM CONVEYOR
WIDTH + 6 3 8"
72"
FL
OW
Transition plate
(option on Fig 112)
2 1/8"
20
BELT SORTER
TO PIE CHUTE
PIE CHUTE
TO ROLLER
3 1/2"
PIE CHUTE TO CHUTE
PIE CHUTE
TO TROUGH
Notes:
1. This unit is designed for use with belt sorters and includes the sorter to pie chute connection.
2. Typical pitch for this unit is 20 degrees.
3. Degree of exit drop kit refers to the difference between the chute and the feeding conveyor.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
130
Conveyor
Class
GV
System Width
18
24
30
Section 2:

Figures
Chute
Length
72
Assembly
Hand
L
R
Exit Drop-Kit
0 Chute to Chute
5 Chute to Chute
10 Chute to Chute
15 Chute to Chute
20 Chute to Chute
25 Chute to Chute
30 Chute to Chute
10 Chute to Roller
15 Chute to Roller
20 Chute to Roller
25 Chute to Roller
30 Chute to Roller
None
Page 19
December, 11
Fig 131: Gravity Straight Chute

Components:
Frame:
3 1/2 deep x 12 gauge formed
chute.
SPECIFY LENGTH

3-1/2"
3/8"
3 1/2" REF.
CHUTE TO CHUTE
Chute Transition plate

(option on Fig 112)
ROLLER TO TROUGH
3 1/2"
CHUTE TO TROUGH
CHUTE TO ROLLER
Notes:
1. Chute length available in 12 increments between 36 and 144. Specify in inches.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
131
Conveyor Class
GV
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
42
Section 2:

Figures
Chute Length
Entry Drop Kit
Exit Drop Kit
0 Chute to Chute
5 Chute to Chute
10 Chute to Chute
15 Chute to Chute
20 Chute to Chute
25 Chute to Chute
30 Chute to Chute
10 Roller to Chute
15 Roller to Chute
20 Roller to Chute
25 Roller to Chute
30 Roller to Chute
None
0 Chute to Chute
5 Chute to Chute
10 Chute to Chute
15 Chute to Chute
20 Chute to Chute
25 Chute to Chute
30 Chute to Chute
10 Chute to Roller
15 Chute to Roller
20 Chute to Roller
25 Chute to Roller
30 Chute to Roller
None
Page 20
December, 11
Fig 132: Gravity Trough Chute

Components:
Frame:
9 1/2 deep x 1 3/8 x 12 gauge
formed chute.
SPECIFY LENGTH
OPTIONAL ENTRY
TRANSITION PLATE
1 3/8"
NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH+ 3/8
1 3/8"
3 1/2" REF.
3/8"
9 1/2"
ROLLER TO TROUGH
6"
5/8
Chute Transition Plate

(option on Fig 112)
3 1/2" REF.
TROUGH TO TROUGH
TROUGH TO ROLLER
Notes:
1. Bed length available in 12 increments between 60 and 144. Specify in inches.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
132
Conveyor
Class
GV
Nominal
Width
18
24
30
36
42
Section 2:

Figures
Chute Length
Entry Transition Plate
Entry Drop Kit
Exit Drop Kit
Y
N
0 Chute to Chute
5 Chute to Chute
10 Chute to Chute
15 Chute to Chute
20 Chute to Chute
25 Chute to Chute
30 Chute to Chute
10 Roller to Chute
15 Roller to Chute
20 Roller to Chute
25 Roller to Chute
30 Roller to Chute
None
0 Chute to Chute
5 Chute to Chute
10 Chute to Chute
15 Chute to Chute
20 Chute to Chute
25 Chute to Chute
30 Chute to Chute
10 Chute to Roller
15 Chute to Roller
20 Chute to Roller
25 Chute to Roller
30 Chute to Roller
None
Page 21
December, 11
Gravity Conveyor
Components and Accessories
- NON PUBLIC INFORMATION -
Copyright 2011, an unpublished work by Automotion, Inc. All rights reserved. This material contains confidential information that is the property of
Section 3:

Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
CRBO Carring Roller (Standard Bearing) ................................................................................. 3
TCRBO Tapered Carring Roller (Standard Bearing) ................................................................ 3
AES: Angle End Stop ................................................................................................................. 4
RRS: Raised Roller Stop ............................................................................................................ 4
DPS: Dead Plate Stop................................................................................................................. 5
AORB: Air Operated Roller Brake ............................................................................................. 5
HORS: Hand Operated Roller Stop ........................................................................................... 6
FORS: Foot Operated Roller Stop ............................................................................................. 6
AORS: Air Operated Roller Stop ............................................................................................... 7
FP: Foot Pedal ............................................................................................................................ 8
FORS: Foot Operated Roller Stop ............................................................................................. 8
ESC: End Stop Cover ................................................................................................................. 9
ABUD: Anit Back Up (Double Row)........................................................................................... 9
TP: Transition Plate .................................................................................................................. 10
ABUD: Anit Back Up (Double Row)......................................................................................... 10
PSW: Proximity Switch Kit....................................................................................................... 11
PPB: Pneumatic Push Button.................................................................................................. 11
GAB-6: Gravity Air Brake ......................................................................................................... 12
GAB-9: Gravity Air Brake ......................................................................................................... 13
GAB-11: Gravity Air Brake ....................................................................................................... 14
WT: Work Table ........................................................................................................................ 15
Section 3:

Page 2
December, 11
CRBO Carrying Roller (Standard Bearing)

"A"
"B"
1 7/8" Dia.
9/16" Ref.
Components:
Medium Duty Roller:
1 7/8" dia. x 16 ga. roller. 7/16"
spring retained hex axle
7/16" Hex
CT3
Light Duty Roller:

1 3/8" dia. x 18 ga. roller. 1/4"
round spring retained axle.
CT4
N.O.A.W.
BR
BI
18"
15 1/2"
16 1/2"
15 7/16"
15 1/4"
16 1/4"
15 3/16"
Oiled, open style.
24"
21 1/2"
22 1/2"
21 7/16"
21 1/4"
22 1/4"
21 3/16"
Technical Data:
30"
27 1/2"
28 1/2"
27 7/16"
27 1/4"
28 1/4"
27 3/16"
Capacity:
36"
33 1/2"
34 1/2"
33 7/16"
33 1/4"
34 1/4"
33 3/16"
100lbs.
Bearing:
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
GV
Model
CRBO
Frame Depth
Width
A
B
18"
24"
30"
36"
TCRBO Tapered Carrying Roller (Standard Bearing)

Components:
"A"
"B"
1 7/8" Dia.
7/16" Hex
9/16" Ref.
Roller:
1 7/8" dia. x 16 ga. roller with
plastic tapered sleeve. 7/16"
spring retained hex axle.
Bearing:
CT3
CT4
Oiled, open style.
N.O.A.W.
BR
BI
18"
15 1/2"
16 1/2"
15 7/16"
15 1/4"
16 1/4"
15 3/16"
Capacity:
24"
21 1/2"
22 1/2"
21 7/16"
21 1/4"
22 1/4"
21 3/16"
100lbs.
30"
27 1/2"
28 1/2"
27 7/16"
27 1/4"
28 1/4"
27 3/16"
36"
33 1/2"
34 1/2"
33 7/16"
33 1/4"
34 1/4"
33 3/16"
Model
CRBO
Frame Depth
3 1/2"
A
B
Technical Data:
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
GV

Width
18"
24"
30"
36"
Page 3
December, 11
AES: Angle End Stop

Components:
Angle:
Formed 10 ga. angle.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
AES
Width
18"
24"
30"
36"
RRS: Raised Roller Stop

Components:
Angle:
Formed 12 ga. angles.
Roller:
1 7/8" dia. x 16 ga. roller with
hex axle.
Notes:
1. Raised Roller Stop includes roller, mounting clips, and all necessary mounting hardware.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
RRS
Width
18"
24"
30"
36"
Section 3:

Page 4
December, 11
DPS: Dead Plate Stop

Components:
Plate:
Formed 16 ga. hot rolled sheet
steel.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
DPS
Width
18"
24"
30"
36"
AORB: Air Operated Roller Brake

Components:
50"
Brake Shoe
(offset for clarity)
Frame:
Formed 10 ga. galvanized frame
2 1/4"
Bladders:
(9) pneumatic bladders.
54"
1 1/16"
3 1/4"
To air supply solenoid
3 1/4"
Notes:
1. Required air supply is 18 psi.
2. Includes cross members and spacers for the mounting of the roller brake unit.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
Model
GV
AORB

Width
Pneumatic Solenoid
18"
24"
30"
36"
Y
N
Page 5
December, 11
HORS: Hand Operated Roller Stop

Description:
Manually operated hand lever
with ball grip raises pivoting stop
roller from carrying roller position
to stop roller position.
Components:
Frame:
Formed 12 ga. side channels.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
GV
HORS
Frame Depth
Width
Hand
3-1/2"
2-1/2"
18"
24"
30"
36"
Right
Left
FORS: Foot Operated Roller Stop

Description:
Depressing foot pedal drops the
stop roller from its normally up
position. Included foot pedal
latch may be installed to hold
stop roller in the down position.
Components:
Frame:
Formed 12 ga. side channels.
Notes:
1. The Foot Operated Roller Stop requires a minimum top of roller elevation of 24"
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
Model
GV
FORS
Frame Depth
Width
3-1/2"
2-1/2"
18"
24"
30"
36"

Page 6
December, 11
AORS: Air Operated Roller Stop

Description:
Pneumatic cylinder raises pivoting
roller from carrying roller position
to stop roller elevation.
Pneumatic cylinder is controlled

by your choice: solenoid,
pneumatic foot switch with stop
roller in the normally up position,
pneumatic detented foot switch to
hold stop roller in either the up or
down position, or a pneumatic
hand switch. Includes tube and
fittings.
Components: (Device Options)
Medium Duty
Solenoid Control Kit
Pneumatic Foot Switch (Normally Up)
Pneumatic Foot Switch (Detented)
Pneumatic Hand Switch
Light duty
Notes:
1. Operating air pressure is 18 PSI. It can be connected to the live roller air manifold.
2. Control device may be installed on the right hand side or left hand side of the conveyor.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
GV

Model
AORS
Width
Control Device
18"
24"
30"
36"
110V AC Solenoid
Foot Switch Norm. Up
Foot Switch -Detented
Hand Switch
None
Page 7
December, 11
FP: Foot Pedal

Components:
Tubing:
30'-0" tubing and fittings as
required by assembly (see notes).
Notes:
1. 125 psi maximum capacity.
2. For use in manually activated air brakes and other pneumatic devices.
3. Low pressure assemblies complete with 1/4" tubing are for use on Air Roller Brakes with a maximum 25 psi
infeed pressure.
4. High pressure assemblies complete with 3/8" tubing are for use with accessories that utilize air cylinders.
5. Treadle style, two detent position foot pedal available only in a high pressure assembly (not shown).
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
GV
FP
Control Device
Low pressure (normally open)
Low pressure (normally closed)
High pressure (momentary)
High pressure (two-position needle)
ALES: Almag End Stop

Description:
Cast Pallet end stop.
Notes:
1. For use with 2" straight or 1-1/2" staggered gravity wheel flow rail only.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
ALES
Section 3:

Page 8
December, 11
ESC: End Stop Cover

Description:
Cover:
steel.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
ESC
ABUD: Anti Back Up (Double Row)

Description:
Anti Back Up:
steel.
Notes:
1. For use with 1-1/2" staggered gravity wheel flowrail only.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
Width
Frame Depth
18"
24"
30"
36"
3-1/2"
2-1/2"
ABUD
Section 3:

Page 9
December, 11
TP: Transition Plate

Description:
Plate:
Formed 12 ga. hot rolled
sheet steel transition plate.
Notes:
1. Component requires the removal and repositioning of the carrying roller following the transition plate.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
Width
TP
18"
24"
30"
36"
TPDK: Transition Plate Drop Kit

Description:
Plate:
Formed 12 ga. hot rolled
sheet steel drop kit bracket.
Notes:
1. Transition Plate Drop Kit includes all necessary mounting hardware.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
GV
TPDK
Width
18"
24"
30"
36"
Section 3:

Page 10
December, 11
PSW: Proximity Switch Kit

Description:
Sensor Roller
Kit:
Uses a mechanical sensor
roller
to
actuate
an
electronic proximity switch.
Proximity Switch
Notes:
1. Includes proximity sensor, sensor roller, and mounting hardware.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
PSW
PPB: Pneumatic Push Button

Components:
Switch:
Two-position pneumatic
selector switch.
Switch:
(3) pieces of 3/8" O.D. poly
tubing, 10'-0" lg. (see note 1)
Notes:
1. Tubing available in special lengths of 36" to 144" in 6" increments only.
2. (2) 3/8" O.D. x 1/4" NPT elbow fittings included with selector switch.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
PPB
Section 3:

Page 11
December, 11
GAB-6: Gravity Air Brake
Description:
1. When product depresses flow control sensor, an air brake is activated,
when the time delay times out the air brake releases.
2. When product depresses spacing sensor, air brake will activate and hold
back product until spacing sensor is cleared. Spacing sensor takes
priority over flow control sensor.
3. When product accumulates back to depress spacing sensor, air brake is
activated to help relieve line pressure.
Components:
Gravity Air Brake:
All components picture above
are
included
with
the
exception of the gravity roller
bed section.
Tubing:
1/4" O.D. EVA tubing.
Notes:
1. A dimension (minimum) should equal longest product length plus (3) inches.
2. Length of tubing supplied allows for the full line sensor to be mounted up to 48" from the air brake assembly.
3. Shim up air break assembly if required with flat washers to bring brake shoe within a 1/8" maximum clearance
of carrying rollers in the down position.
4. To insure consistent cycle time, it is recommended to field locate a low pressure regulator within (5) feet of
the brake bed assembly.
5. Refer to application/installation manual for the control module adjustment procedure.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
Width
GAB-6
18"
24"
30"
36"
Section 3:

Page 12
December, 11
Description:
1. Air brake is activated when full line photo eye is blocked and the time
delay times out.
Components:
Gravity Air Brake:
All components picture above are
included with the exception of the
gravity roller bed section.
Tubing:
Notes:
1. There is no flow control of this product with this arrangement. Product will not be spaced upon entering a
gravity curve.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
Width
GAB-9
18"
24"
30"
36"
Section 3:

Page 13
December, 11
Description:
1. When product depresses flow control sensor, air brake is
activated, when time delay Times Out air brake releases.
2. When product depresses spacing sensor, air brake will activate
and hold back product until spacing sensor is cleared. Spacing
sensor takes priority over flow control censor. Product will be
spaced when entering a gravity curve.
3. When full line photo eye is blocked and time delay times out, air
brake is activated. If photo eye times out it will take priority over
spacing sensor.
Components:
Gravity Air Brake:
All components picture above
are included with the exception
of the gravity roller bed section.
Tubing:
Notes:
1. A dimension (minimum) should equal longest product length plus (3) inches.
5. Refer to application/installation manual for the control module adjustment procedure.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
Width
GAB-11
18"
24"
30"
36"
Section 3:

Page 14
December, 11
WT: Work Table
Notes:
1. Available in 60", 120", and special lengths.
2. Special lengths available from 36" to 144" in 6" increments only.
3. Supports not included.
Components:
Table:
Formed 12 ga. work table.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
Width
Length
18"
24"
30"
36"
60
120
Special
WT
Section 3:

Page 15
December, 11
Belt Conveyor
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 1
November, 11
Table of Contents:
Theory of Operation:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Capabilities: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Summary of Figure Types: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3

Slider Bed: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Roller Bed:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Incline/Decline: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Power Feeder: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Nose Over Sections: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
Brake Belt: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Brake/Induction Belts: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Belt Curves: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Belting:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6
Application Guidelines:----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Conveyor Class:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7
Belting Width: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Roller Spacing: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
Line Pressure: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Direction of Travel: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Horizontal Operation: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Incline/Decline Operation: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Conveyor Widths: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Roller Centers:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Conveyor Speed: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Drive Mounting:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Power Unit Mounting: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Power Unit Selection: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Design Parameters: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Conveyable Items:--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Item Weight:----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Environmental Conditions:--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Belt Curves: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Belt Spirals:---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Determining Curve Width: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
Maximum Angle of Incline/Decline Chart:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Horsepower Calculation Worksheet: --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

Horsepower Calculation Formula:------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Determining the Hand: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 2
November, 11
Belt conveyor is a type of conveyor which conveys the product load directly
upon the belt. Belt conveyor will safely transport wide varieties of product
loads, varying in different sizes and weight. Belt conveyor provides quiet and
stable transportation between destinations as well as constant spacing
between the product loads.
The belting of a belt conveyor rides upon a roller bed, a slider bed pan or a
hybrid cross between the two of them.
Capabilities:
Belt conveyors are used primarily for transportation since most belting maintains a high coefficient of friction with the
product. Since the coefficient of friction between a product load and belt is considerably higher than that of a roller
type conveyor, belt conveyors are typically used to negotiate elevation changes. Product on a belt is usually spaced
with gaps between the products.
Brake/Spacer belts are used to hold product loads in an accumulation mode on a live roller conveyor or to start the
accumulation feature of a live roller accumulation conveyor.
Brake/Spacer belt conveyors are also used as sorter induction units. Through a sprocket change between the drive
and tail sections of the conveyor, a speed difference between the two sections thus provides a nominal gap between
product loads.
Belt conveyors fitted with a slick top belt are used for arm-type sortation applications. Belt conveyors are used in this
fashion because product load will maintain spacing regardless of the conveyor length. Product load spacing is
maintained due to the product loads riding directly upon the belt.
Belt conveyor will handle varying loads including those of irregular shapes and construction, soft bottoms, sacks and
bags that may sag between rollers. Belt conveyor is ideally suited for fragile product loads because of its smooth and
consistent carrying surface. Conveying is done without causing jams due to product slippage or loads getting side by
side or damaging product loads.
Summary of Figure Types:

Slider Bed:
Constructed from a formed steel box, the slider bed (SB) is a simple yet durable design that produces a quiet and
smooth running conveyor with the ability to withstand all sorts of rigorous day to day material handling work. If
necessary, an Impact Slider Bed SBI), which has the added strength of a steel reinforcement angle, is also available.
The coefficient of friction for slider bed conveyor is higher than most
powered conveyor types, approximately 30% between the belt and bed.
The higher coefficient of friction in turn will translate to more horsepower
per foot of loading required as compared to a conveyor with a roller bed
under the carrying surface or product.
Cost for slider bed conveyor is generally the lowest of all powered
conveyors. Because of its high coefficient of friction, requiring more
horsepower for operation over comparable belt conveyors, long runs are
sometimes impractical. Another limiting factor for the use of slider bed
conveyor might be spare part inventory. Due to its higher coefficient of
friction a wider range of motors may be needed in stock to cover the
different variations of drive trains in a system.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 3
November, 11
Roller Bed:
In belt on roller conveyor, rollers are suspended within

a pair of formed steel side channels. The conveyor
belt rides upon the roller bed (RB) allowing it to have
the lowest coefficient of friction of traditional powered
conveyor designs. With a coefficient of friction of 5%,
this allows for less horsepower to drive the conveyor
than a comparable slider bed unit.
Conveyance is slightly less stable on a belt on roller
conveyor than a slider bed design.
Level belt
conveyors will require a minimum of 2 rollers under the
package at all times. Incline and decline conveyors
require 3 or more rollers under the package at all
times. This is to eliminate the product load from
rocking as it passes over the supporting rollers making
it more stable and less prone to fall over.
The conveyor speed should be the length of the
product load plus the desired gap between the loads
multiplied by the units to be handled per minute.
Incline/Decline:
Incline/decline belt conveyors are used extensively when elevation changes must be made with complete control over
the product load. Generally, the center of gravity of the product load determines the maximum angle of incline or
decline, more so than the friction between the belt and load.
Roller bed intermediates are normally used on incline and decline conveyors. Due to the low coefficient of friction
lower horsepower are required making it viable to lift heavier loads.
A powered belt feeder should be used on all incline/decline belt conveyors over 10. Friction surface type belting is
used on the feeder while rough-top belting is used on the incline portion of the unit.
Nose Over Splice (NOS) are available in 12 1/2 and 22 1/2 degree segments for all incline/decline belt conveyors.
These splices with 5 adjustment provides a smooth transition from incline to horizontal or vice-versa.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 4
November, 11
Power Feeder:
When a horizontal conveyor is to feed an incline/decline with an angle over 10, a power feeder should be used.
A gap needs to be created by a speed differential between the power feeder and the incline/decline section of the
unit. This is to prevent the tops of the product load from pinching as they make the transition between the
incline/decline and the horizontal conveyor.
On an incline belt conveyor the power feeder should operate at a slightly
slower speed than the incline portion. In the case of a decline belt, the
power tail is installed as a take-away conveyor and should run at a slightly
faster speed. The differential in speeds between the two sections will
create gaps in the product load if they reach the power feeder in a slug.
The minimum length of a power feeder should be a least belt width plus
12. This is to provide a belt that can be easily tracked. A friction surface
type belt is used on the power feeder and a rough-top type belt on the
incline.
Power feeders may be omitted if fed or taken away by a belt conveyor. As
long as speeds can be adjusted to act as a feeder.
Nose Over Sections:
Nose over sections are for providing a smooth transition at the top of an incline/decline conveyor to or from a
horizontal position. Nose over sections are available in 12 1/2 and 22 1/2 each capably of 5 adjustment and
should be used to reduce impact of the product load on the conveyor as it makes the transition between inclined to
horizontal and vice-versa.
Brake Belt:
It is common practice to use a belt conveyor to brake, stop or hold back product loads at the end of a powered or
gravity accumulation lane. A slider brake belt conveyor uses a rough-top belt and should also have a brake motor
provided. This configuration will provide a smooth conveying surface and give a high coefficient of friction for holding
back accumulated product.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 5
November, 11
Brake/Induction Belts:
Brake/Induction belts are used to singulate product loads for induction into a sortation system and to singulate and space out
product loads to allow diverting. Brake/Induction belts are also used to interface with workers and to automated equipment, to
singulate product loads out of an accumulation line and to provide a prevalent and consistent spacing between loads.
Belt conveyor is commonly used to space product loads. Using a pair of belt conveyors, the product load will enter the first belt
at a predetermined rate. Traveling onto the second belt conveyor the load is sped up to introduce a gap between loads.
Belt Curves:
Belt curves are used for handling product loads that need to maintain orientation
and proper spacing through a curve, or that may not negotiate the gap between
the rollers of a live roller curve.
Belt curves are used for handling loads that are not suitable for transportation
upon live roller curves such as sacks, small items, skids or totes that have
runners located at right angles to the direction of product flow.
Belt curves allow conveyor lines to make turns and to keep the direction of flow
constant, along with carton spacing. Belt curves, although not widely used
because of their higher per unit cost, are a viable solution to where either one of
these requirements is a necessity or space restrictions prior to feeding a sort line
negate other alternatives.
Belt curves provide positive carton spacing through turns because the product load rides directly upon a belt. With the product
load riding directly upon the belt, belt curves can be started and stopped without changing carton spacing. The positive,
smooth and even motion of a belt curve prevents product loads from hitting and jamming thus greatly reducing tendencies for
fragile loads to break or spill.
Belt curves are used only for transportation of product loads through turns. Belt curves handle a wide variety of product sizes
ranging from a couple of ounces to 100 lbs. High speeds may also require the use of belt curves. Especially if used prior to a
sortation system. Standard turning angles range from 15 to 350 degrees in varying widths.
Belting:
Several different types of belting are available for use on a belt conveyor. These belts range from older styles like cotton duct
and rubber belts to exotic non-marking urethane compounds. The two types of belts that are normally used on belt conveyor
are smooth nitrile impregnated friction surface and Rough-Top. These belts are most widely used because of their inherently
low stretch factor and the wide environment in which they may be used.
A friction surface x bare surface (F. S. x B.S.) Type 1 belt is normally used on horizontal conveyors, power feeders and
shallow inclines (where carton slippage not a factor).
Rough-Top belt is used for incline and decline applications. It has a textured surface that provides greater gripping
ability to the product load thus reducing or eliminating package slipping. Rough-Top belting allows incline and decline
angles of up to 27 1/2 degrees, as long as product conveyed will allow. Rough-Top belting should also be used on
brake/spacer belts. This will eliminate conveyor line pressure from pushing product loads over and past the brake belt.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 6
November, 11
The following information is intended to assist those individuals involved in the application of Belt Conveyor in material
handling systems:
Conveyor Class:
Automotion Belt Conveyor is available in (3) conveyor classes: Slider Bed (SB), Impact Slider Bed (SBI) and
Roller Bed (RB). While each class type differs in construction, each features Automotions Axle Isolator Noise
Reduction System. In this system, each roller axle is held in the frame, by an axle isolator. The plastic axle
isolator reduces vibrations transmitted between the rollers and the conveyor frame and metal to metal
contact. Along with precision bearings, axle isolators make for a quieter performing conveyor. Additional
frame and roller details are listed below:
Frame: (Slider (SB) and Impact Slider Beds (SBI)) Each slider bed type is composed of a 5 1/4 high
x 12 Ga. shell. The impact slider beds add a 1 1/2 x 1 1/2 x 3/16 steel angle running across the
width of the bed for additional durability. One angle is welded to the shell approximately every 24.
The sides of the bed are kept vertical and parallel by a 1 dia. x 13 ga. spreader. The shell is also
punched with a 5/8 hex opening for the return rollers.
Frame: (Roller Beds RB): 5 high x 4 13/16 wide (top flange) x 12 ga. galv. formed side channel.
Like the slider bed, roller beds also use a 1 dia. x 13 ga. spreader to keep the bed sides both vertical
and parallel. The channel is punched with a 5/8 hex opening on to accommodate carrying rollers on
either 6 or 9 centers. Additional 5/8 hex punches also exist for the return rollers.
Return Rollers:
1-7/8 Dia., 7/16 hex spring loaded axles with ABEC-1 precision bearings.
Carrying Rollers (RB conveyor only):
1-7/8 Dia., 7/16 hex spring loaded axles with ABEC-1 precision bearings.
Belting Width:
Belting for this conveyor is narrower than the overall width of the conveyor. Whether for an incline/decline or a
horizontal conveyor unit the following belt widths apply.
Nominal Conveyor Width
18
24
30
36
42
48
Actual Conveyor Width

18 3/8
24 3/8
30 3/8
36 3/8
42 3/8
48 3/8
Effective Belt Width

15
20
24
30
36
42
Roller Spacing:
Product loads carried on a roller bed conveyor should be supported by 2 rollers at all times. In situations
where the bottom of the product load is not firm, the contents within the package may cause the load to sag
between the supporting rollers. To minimize or eliminate sagging, the contents of the package should be
taken into consideration. Roller centers should be less than the smallest possible article within the package
whenever the possibility of sagging exists. Live load will also determine the maximum roller centers.
Lc = Roller Centers Required to Minimize
or Reduce sagging
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 7
November, 11
Line Pressure:
Because the product load is being carried directly upon the belt of a Belt Conveyor there is no line pressure
that may damage or crush the leading carton or product.
Direction of Travel:
Belt (BC) conveyors are designed for omni-directional transportation of product loads. Although reversible
travel is possible on a belt conveyor it should only be done on a conveyor unit equipped with center drive, an
auxiliary horizontal take-up assembly. Conveyor units equipped with an end drive assembly may also be
reversed but should be limited to shorter conveyors of 25-0 in length. Consult Automotions engineering
department on all reversible conveyor applications.
Reversible center drive conveyors require an additional, opposing horizontal or manual take-up to provide
proper belt tension when traveling in reverse direction.
Horizontal Operation:
A Belt conveyor will operate at its maximum efficiency when applied as a horizontal conveyor. While SB or
RB may be used as an incline or decline conveyor, it is very well suited to handle long transportation runs.
Because of the low coefficient of friction, in many cases the only limiting factor to its overall length is effective
belt pull capacity of the drive itself. Care should be used when a belt conveyor is being used as a pick belt.
Drifting of the belt could be a problem, requiring the use of belt guides for additional belt tracking control.
Incline/Decline Operation:
The center of gravity of the product load, will determine at what angle the product load will be able to
negotiate an incline or decline. Generally the center of the product load must fall within the center one third of
the bottom of the load.
To determine if the center will fall within the proper range draw the conveyor angle with the load located on
top of it. Draw a plumb line from the center of the load downward, divide the bottom of the box into thirds and
check the results.
" L"
1/3
" L"
"L"
1/3
Box 2
" H"
Box 1
"H"
"L"
Box 1:
This box may convey out of the
horizontal plane but is at risk of tipping
once it is on the incline/decline. For
best results, this box should be laid
down to lower the center of gravity.
Box 2: Proper Orientation.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 8
November, 11
Conveyor Widths:
SB and RB conveyor is available in standard widths (nominal overall widths) of 18, 24, 30 and 36. In
addition to the before mentioned widths some configurations of SB conveyor are also available in 42 and 48
widths (nominal overall widths). These additional widths are for primarily used in trash conveyor systems. As
with all types of conveyor it is recommended that the conveyor width be greater than the widest item to be
conveyed. (Reference the conveyor width charts on page 11 of this section).
Roller Centers:
Roller Belt (RB) conveyors are available with the carrying rollers located on 6 and 9 centers.
Conveyor Speed:
Belt conveyors are available with standard fixed speeds of 60 thru 200 feet per minute in increments of 10
feet per minute and 200 thru 320 feet per minute in increments of 20 feet per minute. For any application
requiring slower or faster speeds please consult Automotions Engineering Department for approval.
The required conveyor speed will depend upon the systems flow-rate requirements and the conveyors
release mode.
Drive Mounting:
All Belt Conveyor center drive components are designed, manufactured and stocked for mounting beneath
the conveyor bed section. Belt Conveyor end drive components are designed, manufactured and stocked for
either an under-mounted or side-mounted motor and reducer assembly. No special drive mounting locations
are available.
Power Unit Mounting:
The standard power unit mounting consists of a foot mounted right angle C-flange reducer, 230/460/3/60
TEFC- C-face motor, roller chain, and sprocket drive set with hardened teeth, located on the right side of the
drive belt. If required, left-handed drive units are available upon request.
Brake motors are available in the following sizes:
3/4 & 1 HP
1 1/2 & 2 HP
3 HP
Power Unit Selection:
Design Parameters:
6 ft/lb brake
10 ft/lb brake
15 ft/lb brake
Refer to the Belt Conveyor Section 3: Components and Accessories for drive selection.
Minimum Unit Load: 6 lg.
Product Flow: Omni-directional.
Conveyable Items:
In general, almost any item can be conveyed on a belt conveyor. This includes such items as cartons, cases,
tote pans, drums, trays, etc.
Note: Transfers, such as terminal end to terminal end on a horizontal conveyor to an incline conveyor may be problematic
for small items. Any such problems must be addressed during design stages.
Item Weight:
A belt conveyor will convey items weighing as little as less than an ounce to as much as 100 lbs./ft. or more. The limiting
factor in most cases being available horsepower. The entire range of weights may be conveyed simultaneously without
any need for adjustments etc.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 9
November, 11
Environmental Conditions:
Belt conveyor is designed to operate within the normal temperature and atmospheric conditions found in
plants and warehouses. Several conditions that require consideration include:
High Temperatures
Do not use a belt conveyor in an application where the ambient temperature exceeds 130F. All of the
components are within safe operating limits up to this temperature.
Cold Room Temperatures
Belt conveyor may be used in applications where the ambient temperature is as low as 39F. without requiring
special consideration. Room temperature of below 38F. or lower should be treated as Freezer temperatures
All conveyors in cold room applications require special oil and grease to keep them from requiring excessive
amounts of horsepower to start and maintain design parameters.
Freezer Temperatures
Belt conveyor may be used in applications where the ambient temperature is between 38 and 0F., however,
horsepower calculations must be increased by 25%. For freezer temperatures between 0 and -20F.
increase horsepower calculations by 50%.
All cold room and freezer applications must include special oil, grease and belting to keep the conveyor unit
from requiring excessive amounts of horsepower to start and maintain design parameters. Please consult
Automotions Engineering Department for further details.
Oily Conditions
Applications that expose the carrying rollers to an oily mist or to dripping oil, is not recommended.
Applications in oily environments must be referred to Automotions Engineering Department for further details.
While belt conveyor has a positive contact by the product load, the oil present may have adverse effects upon
the conveying belt. In addition to affecting the conveyor belt, product loads may slide upon negotiating an
incline or decline, thus creating a hazardous condition.
Belt Curves:
Belt curves are constructed with a slider bed frame on which the belt is carried. Where product loads are in
excess of 40 lbs. bed relief rollers are to be provided, thus reducing wear on the belt.
Belt Spirals:
Along with regular horizontal turns, belt curves can be

manufactured to provide lift in a spiral fashion. The use of this type
of conveyor can reduce floor space required for an incline
conveyor to produce a rise of 12-0 at 22 degrees from nearly
30-0 (not including power feeder) to approximately 10-0, freeing
up valuable floor space.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 10
November, 11
Determining Curve Width:

An important factor in conveyor layout design is the products ability to negotiate a curved conveyor section.
It is more often preferred that the product load maintain its original orientation through the curve.
The following formula is used to determine the necessary conveyor width a product requires to travel through
a curve while still maintaining 2 of clearance through the turn.
Curve Selection Chart (Standard Curve)*
Carton Width (in.)
Carton Length (in.)

9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
12
12
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
12
15
15
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
15
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
20
20
21
18
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
23
23
24
21
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
26
26
26
24
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
29
27
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
32
32
30
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
35
35
33
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
38
38
36
39
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
41
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Required
Conveyor Width
18
24
30
36
42
Page 11
November, 11
Maximum Angle of Incline/Decline Chart:

MAXIMUM ANGLE OF INCLINE/DECLINE
(ANGLE IN DEGREES)
Length of Product in Inches
30 Deg.
Incline
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
29.1
9
26.6
8
28.1 24.0
7
25.0 21.3
6 26.6 21.8 18.4
5 22.6 18.4 15.5
4 18.4 14.9 12.5
4
5
6
29.7
27.6
25.5
23.2
20.9
18.4
15.9
13.4
10.8
28.4
26.6
24.6
22.6
20.6
18.4
16.3
14.0
11.8
9.5
29.1
27.4
25.7
24.0
22.2
20.3
18.4
16.5
14.5
12.5
10.5
8.4
29.5
28.1
26.6
25.0
23.4
21.8
20.1
18.4
16.7
14.9
13.1
11.3
9.5
7.6
10
29.9
28.6
27.3
25.9
24.4
23.0
21.5
20.0
18.4
16.9
15.3
13.6
12.0
10.3
8.3
6.9
11
29.1
27.8
26.6
25.3
24.0
22.6
21.3
19.9
18.4
17.0
15.5
14.0
12.5
11.0
9.5
7.9
6.3
12
29.4
28.3
27.1
26.0
24.8
23.6
22.3
21.0
19.7
18.4
17.1
15.8
14.4
13.0
11.6
10.2
8.7
7.3
5.9
13
29.7
28.7
27.6
26.6
25.5
24.3
23.2
22.0
20.9
19.7
18.4
17.2
15.9
14.7
13.4
12.1
10.8
9.5
8.1
6.8
5.4
14
29.1
28.1
27.1
26.1
25.0
24.0
22.9
21.8
20.7
19.6
18.4
17.3
16.1
14.9
13.7
12.5
11.3
10.1
8.8
7.6
6.3
5.1
15
29.4
28.4
27.5
26.6
25.6
24.6
23.6
22.6
21.6
20.6
19.5
18.4
17.4
16.3
15.2
14.0
12.9
11.8
10.6
9.5
8.3
7.1
5.9
4.8
16
29.6
28.8
27.9
27.0
26.1
25.2
24.3
23.3
22.4
21.4
20.4
19.4
18.4
17.4
16.4
15.4
14.3
13.2
12.2
11.1
10.0
8.9
7.8
6.7
5.6
4.5
17
29.9
29.1
28.2
27.4
26.6
25.7
24.8
24.0
23.1
22.2
21.3
20.3
19.4
18.4
17.5
16.5
15.5
14.5
13.5
12.5
11.5
10.5
9.5
8.4
7.4
6.3
5.3
4.2
18
29.3
28.5
27.8
27.0
26.2
25.3
24.5
23.7
22.8
22.0
21.1
20.2
19.3
18.4
17.5
16.6
15.7
14.7
13.8
12.8
11.9
10.9
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
19
29.5
28.8
28.1
27.3
26.6
25.8
25.0
24.2
23.4
22.6
21.8
21.0
20.1
19.3
18.4
17.6
16.7
15.8
14.9
14.0
13.1
12.2
11.3
10.4
9.5
8.5
7.6
6.7
5.7
4.8
3.8
20
29.7
29.1
28.4
27.6
26.9
26.2
25.5
24.7
24.0
23.2
22.4
21.6
20.9
20.1
19.2
18.4
17.6
16.8
15.9
15.1
14.3
13.4
12.5
11.7
10.8
9.9
9.0
8.1
7.2
6.3
5.4
4.5
3.6
21
28.6
27.9
27.3
26.6
25.9
25.2
24.4
23.7
23.0
22.2
21.5
20.7
20.0
19.2
18.4
17.7
16.9
16.1
15.3
14.4
13.6
12.8
12.0
11.1
10.3
9.5
8.6
7.8
6.9
6.1
5.2
4.3
3.5
22
27.6
26.9
26.2
25.6
24.9
24.2
23.5
22.8
22.1
21.4
20.6
19.9
19.2
18.4
17.7
16.9
16.2
15.4
14.6
13.8
13.1
12.3
11.5
10.7
9.9
9.1
8.2
7.4
6.6
5.8
5.0
4.1
3.3
23
25 Deg.
Incline
26.6
25.9
25.3
24.6
24.0
23.3
22.6
21.9
21.3
20.6
19.9
19.1
18.4
17.7
17.0
16.3
15.5
14.8
14.0
13.3
12.5
11.8
11.0
10.2
9.5
8.7
7.9
7.1
6.3
5.6
4.8
4.0
3.2
24
25.6
25.0
24.4
23.7
23.1
22.5
21.8
21.1
20.5
19.8
19.1
18.4
17.7
17.0
16.3
15.6
14.9
14.2
13.5
12.8
12.0
11.3
10.6
9.8
9.1
8.3
7.6
6.8
6.1
5.3
4.6
3.8
3.1
25
24.8
24.2
23.6
22.9
22.3
21.7
21.0
20.4
19.7
19.1
18.4
17.8
17.1
16.4
15.8
15.1
14.4
13.7
13.0
12.3
11.6
10.9
10.2
9.5
8.7
8.0
7.3
6.6
5.9
5.1
4.4
3.7
2.9
26
24.0
23.4
22.8
22.2
21.6
20.9
20.3
19.7
19.1
18.4
17.8
17.2
16.5
15.9
15.2
14.5
13.9
13.2
12.5
11.9
11.2
10.5
9.8
9.1
8.4
7.7
7.0
6.3
5.6
4.9
4.2
3.5
2.8
27
23.2
22.6
22.0
21.4
20.9
20.3
19.7
19.0
18.4
17.8
17.2
16.6
15.9
15.3
14.7
14.0
13.4
12.7
12.1
11.4
10.8
10.1
9.5
8.8
8.1
7.5
6.8
6.1
5.4
4.8
4.1
3.4
2.7
28
22.5
21.9
21.3
20.8
20.2
19.6
19.0
18.4
17.8
17.2
16.6
16.0
15.4
14.8
14.2
13.6
12.9
12.3
11.7
11.1
10.4
9.8
9.1
8.5
7.9
7.2
6.6
5.9
5.3
4.6
3.9
3.3
2.6
29
21.8
21.3
20.7
20.1
19.6
19.0
18.4
17.9
17.3
16.7
16.1
15.5
14.9
14.3
13.7
13.1
12.5
11.9
11.3
10.7
10.1
9.5
8.8
8.2
7.6
7.0
6.3
5.7
5.1
4.4
3.8
3.2
2.5
30
21.2
20.6
20.1
19.5
19.0
18.4
17.9
17.3
16.8
16.2
15.6
15.0
14.5
13.9
13.3
12.7
12.1
11.5
11.0
10.4
9.8
9.2
8.3
8.0
7.4
6.7
6.1
5.5
4.9
4.3
3.7
3.1
2.5
31
20.6
20.0
19.5
19.0
18.4
17.9
17.4
16.8
16.3
15.7
15.2
14.6
14.0
13.5
12.9
12.3
11.8
11.2
10.6
10.0
9.5
8.9
8.3
7.7
7.1
6.5
5.9
5.4
4.8
4.2
3.6
3.0
2.4
32
20.0
19.5
19.0
18.4
17.9
17.4
16.9
16.3
15.8
15.3
14.7
14.2
13.6
13.1
12.5
12.0
11.4
10.9
10.3
9.7
9.2
8.6
8.0
7.5
6.9
6.3
5.8
5.2
4.6
4.0
3.5
2.9
2.3
33
19.4
18.9
18.4
17.9
17.4
16.9
16.4
15.9
15.4
14.8
14.3
13.8
13.2
12.7
12.2
11.6
11.1
10.6
10.0
9.5
8.9
8.4
7.8
7.3
6.7
6.2
5.6
5.0
4.5
3.9
3.4
2.8
2.2
34
18.9
18.4
17.9
17.4
16.9
16.4
15.9
15.4
14.9
14.4
13.9
13.4
12.9
12.4
11.8
11.3
10.8
10.3
9.7
9.2
8.7
8.1
7.6
7.1
6.5
6.0
5.4
4.9
4.4
3.8
3.3
2.7
2.2
35
18.4
18.0
17.5
17.0
16.5
16.0
15.5
15.0
14.5
14.0
13.5
13.0
12.5
12.0
11.5
11.0
10.5
10.0
9.5
8.9
8.4
7.9
7.4
6.9
6.3
5.8
5.3
4.8
4.2
3.7
3.2
2.7
2.1
36
Height of Product in Inches
The above Maximum Angle of Incline/Decline Chart can be used to quickly determine the maximum incline or decline
that your product load may negotiate without falling over. These values are based upon a product load with the
contents distributed evenly within it. Special consideration must be taken for product loads that may shift or have a
center of gravity that is higher than described previously in this sections application guidelines incline / decline
operations. These special circumstances must be determined prior to the selection of a maximum angle of incline or
decline. Testing with the actual product load in question will confirm the correct angle to be used.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 12
November, 11
Horsepower Calculation Worksheet:

Conveyor Number
Conveyor Type:
Roller Centers:
Conveyor Length
Conveyor Width:
Carton Rate:
A=[(
B= (
#/ft +
LL
#x
LL
DL
Net Lift
#/ft ) x
)+(
TPD
#+
PF
x .05 ) + (
Deflectors
DTE
#]x
CF
# x .3 ) + (
#)=
Slaved Conv. EBP
# ) x 1.25 = EBP
#+B
(A
Length
Check Belt Strength, Select Drive Size: _______________________

x Conveyor Speed
31,350
EBP
= EHP
Check Reducer Size, Select Motor Size:

Reducer
Size:
Driven
Sprocket
Driver
Sprocket
Ratio:
Conveyor Number
Conveyor Type:
Roller Centers:
Conveyor Length
Conveyor Width:
Carton Rate:
A=[(
B= (
(A
LL
LL
#/ft +
#x
DL
Net Lift
#/ft ) x
)+(
Length
TPD
#+
PF
x .05 ) + (
Deflectors
DTE
#]x
CF
# x .3 ) + (
#)=
Slaved Conv EBP
# ) x 1.25 = EBP
#+B
Check Belt Strength, Select Drive Size: _______________________

EBP
x Conveyor Speed
31,350
= EHP
Check Reducer Size, Select Motor Size:

Reducer
Size:
Section 1:
Ratio:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:
Driver
Sprocket
Driven
Sprocket
Page 13
November, 11
Horsepower Calculation Formula:

Step 1: Determine Live Load (LL)
Use one of the following formulas:
Total Load on Conveyor (lbs.) = Live Load (lbs./ft)
Conveyor Length (ft)
Product Weight (lbs. / carton x Product Rate (carton / minute) = Live Load (lbs. / ft.)
Conveyor Speed (ft. / minute)
Product Weight (lbs.) = Live Load (lbs./ft)
Product Length (ft)
Consider that gapped product will reduce the actual live loading. Belt inclines have product gapped at 30% due to the
power feeder; belt sorters have product gapped because of belt speed and product rate. The gapping of LR
singulation release has been accounted for in the CF factor.
Step 2: Determine Dead Load (DL)
Use Chart #1 to determine dead loads.
DL = Dead Load (lbs./ft).
DTE = Drive and Terminal End Dead Load (lbs.)
Chart 1: Dead Loads
Slider Bed (lbs. / ft.)
Belting Type
#1 Type
#3 Type
18
.8
2.0
24
1.06
2.66
30
1.33
3.2
36
1.6
4.0
42
1.86
4.8
48
2.17
5.6
Roller Bed (lbs. / ft.)

Belting Type
#1 Type (6 o/c)
#3 Type (6 o/c)
#1 Type (9 o/c)
#3 Type (9 o/c)
18
5.4
7.2
4.0
5.8
24
7.4
9.8
5.5
7.9
30
9.4
12.2
6.9
9.7
36
11.0
15.0
8.0
12.0
42
13.3
17.7
9.8
14.2
48
15.6
20.4
11.6
16.4
Power Feeder / Tail Assembly (lbs.)

18
PF Value
70 lbs.
24
88 lbs.
30
107 lbs.
36
126 lbs.
Drive and Terminal End (lbs.)

18
DTE
130 lbs.
24
161 lbs.
30
194 lbs.
36
227 lbs.
42
260 lbs.
48
293 lbs.
Step 3: Determine Effective Belt Pull (EBP)

A.
EBP = { [ ( LL + DL ) x Length + DTE ] x CF + ( H + TPD + SLV ) } x 1.25
SB -- Belt on Slider Bed Conveyor ........................................... CF = 0.30

RB -- Belt on Roller Bed Conveyor .......................................... CF = 0.05
B.
Incline/Decline Elevation Change ...................................... H = ( LL + DL ) x Height ( ft )
C.
Two and Three Pulley Devices ......................................TPD = BP ( prior to device ) x 0.05
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 14
November, 11
Step 4: Effective Belt Pull vs. Strength of Provided Belt

Use Chart #2 to verify that the Effective Belt Pull (lbs.) you just calculated does not exceed the belt strength of the
standard Automotion provided belts.
Chart 2: Maximum Belt Pull Rating of Standard Belting
Belt Conveyor
Conveyor Width
18
24
15
20
Belt Width
Belting Type
#1 120 piw Polymate FS x FS
1275
1700
#3 90 piw 2-ply rough top
960
1280
30
24
36
30
42
36
48
42
2040
1536
2550
1920
n/a
2304
n/a
2688
Step 5: Select Drive Pulley Size

Using Chart #3 and considering the Effective Belt Pull, select the appropriate Drive Pulley Size.
Chart 3: Drive Type Selection
Belt Conveyor
Drive Type
Max. EBP
6CD, 6DE
375 lbs.
8CD, 8DE
600 lbs.
10CD
900 lbs.
Max. HP
1.5 HP
3.0 HP
5.0 HP
Drive Dia.
6.5
8.5
10.5
Shaft Dia.
19
23
27
Exit T1 TE
5.19
6.23
6.27
Entry T2 TE
4.19
5.19
5.19
Step 6: Calculate Conveyor Speed (fpm)

Using this formula and the appropriate factor, calculate the conveyor speed for case feet required.
Conveyor Speed x Factor = Case Feet = Linear Amount of Cartons Moved
SB/RB Belt Conveyor.............................................................. Factor = 1.0
If you require a specific gap between cartons on SB/RB, adjust conveyor speed accordingly.
Step 7: Compute Requires Effective Horsepower
EBP x Conveyor Speed (fpm) = EHP (hp)
31,350
Step 8: Select Required Motor / Reducer
Select the required Motor/Reducer by using your computed EHP and the drive train data sheets found in Section 3:
Components and Accessories.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 15
November, 11
Determining the Hand:

Drive hand is determined by the location of
the drive assemblys drive chain guard.
Looking down the length of the conveyor
from the entry end you can identify the drive
hand. A conveyor with the drive guard on
the right hand side of the conveyor utilizes a
right hand drive and a conveyor with the
drive guard on the left hand side of the
conveyor utilizes a left hand drive.
Reducer hand can differ from the drive hand
due to the orientation of the drive hand
assembly. A reducers hand is determined
by looking at the motor/reducer assembly,
from the motor end of the assembly. From
this point of view the side of the reducer that
the reducers output shaft protrudes
determines the hand.
Section 1:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 16
November, 11
Belt Conveyor
Figures
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
Figure Listing: Entry, Intermediate and Exit Units .................................................................. 3
Figure Listing: Drive Units......................................................................................................... 4
How to use Belt Conveyor Figures to Assemble a Belt Conveyor ......................................... 5
Fig 1: Belt Terminal End Bed: (Belt TE Bed) ............................................................................ 6
Fig 2: Belt Terminal End Swing Take Up Bed: (Belt TE STU Bed).......................................... 7
Fig 7: Belt Power Feeder Up Service Bed: (Belt PF Up Service Bed)..................................... 8
Fig 8: Belt Power Feeder Down Service Bed: (Belt PF Down Service Bed)........................... 9
Fig 20: Belt Bed: ....................................................................................................................... 10
Fig 21: Belt Swing Take Up Bed: (Belt STU Bed) ................................................................... 11
Fig 22: Belt Horizontal Take Up Bed: (Belt HTU Bed)............................................................ 12
Fig 30: Belt Center Drive Bed: (Belt CD Bed) ......................................................................... 13
Fig 32: Belt Center Drive Terminal Bed - Entry: (Belt CD TE Bed) ....................................... 14
Fig 33: Belt Center Drive Terminal Bed - Exit: (Belt CD TE Bed).......................................... 15
Fig 40: Belt End Drive Bed: (Belt DE Bed).............................................................................. 16
Fig 41: Belt End Drive Swing Take Up Bed: (Belt DE STU Bed) ........................................... 17
Fig 42: Brake Belt: .................................................................................................................... 18
Fig 43: Brake Spacer Belt: ....................................................................................................... 19
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
Page 2
December, 11
Figure Listing: Entry, Intermediate and Exit Units
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
Page 3
December, 11
Figure Listing: Drive Units
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
Page 4
December, 11
How to use Belt Conveyor Figures to Assemble a Belt Conveyor

Example 1)
Example 2)
Example 3)
Example 4)
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
Page 5
December, 11
Fig 1: Belt Terminal End Bed: (Belt TE Bed)
*Slider Bed (SB) conveyor class shown.
Components:
Bed Section: 5 1/4" deep x 12 ga. Steel channel.
Roller: 1 7/8" dia. Roller with 7/16" hex axle and axle isolators.
Terminal Pulley: See TE type for details.
(See Section 3: Components and Accessories for description)
Notes:
Bed/Belt Length Chart:
1. Additional belt may be required for

options selected.
2. Use Chart (right) for overall figure
and belt length required per option.
3. 6NTE is not available for 42 and
48 wide conveyor.
4. All carrying rollers contain ABEC-1
precision bearings standard.
5. Available in lengths from 36 to 144
(in 6 increments).
How to Specify:
Qty.
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Entry / Exit Section
Conveyor Widths: (O.A.W)
18", 24", 30", 36", 42" and 48"
Roller centers:
(RB only): 6" and 9"
Conv. Class Figure

1
SB
SBI
RB
Terminal End Assy.
Width
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
42
48
See
Note 5
1-4TE
3-5TE
5-6TE
7-6NTE
9-6TEHD
Overall Length
Modifiers
Based on a 144" bed section
Length with POR &

DK Assy.
Length without POR &

DK Assy.
Belt Length with Std.

144 Bed
151-1/2
151-1/4
152-1/4
159
149-1/8
149-1/8
150-3/8
157-1/4
301
302
305
319
O.A. Belt Length
Option:
O.A.L.
12 Nose Over
+ 3
+6
22 Nose Over
+ 3 3/8
+6 3/4
*Roller Centers POR and DK

2
3
None
POR
POR / DK
POR / DK
TE Type
4TE
5TE
6TE
6NTE
6TEHD
*Applies to (RB) Roller Belt conveyor only
Options:
1). 12 Nose Over

2). 22 Nose Over
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
3). Punch Frame for Top Mount Guard Rail

6). Machine Crown Pulleys
15). Bottom Covers
Page 6
December, 11
Fig 2: Belt Terminal End Swing Take Up Bed: (Belt TE STU Bed)
*Slider Bed (SB) conveyor class shown.
Components:
Roller: 1 7/8" dia. Roller with 7/16" hex axle and axle isolators.
Terminal Pulley: See TE type for details.
(See Section 3: Components and Accessories for description)
Notes:

Terminal End Assy.

options selected.
2. Use Chart (right) for overall figure and
belt length required per option.
4. Available in lengths from 72 to 144
(in 6 increments).
How to Specify:
Qty.
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Entry / Exit Section
18", 24", 30", 36", 42" and 48"
Roller centers:
Conv. Class Figure

2
SB
SBI
RB
Width
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
42
48
See
Note 4
1-4TE
3-5TE
5-6TE
7-6NTE
9-6TEHD
Overall Length
Modifiers
Based on a 144" bed section
Length with POR & Length without POR & Belt Length with Std.
DK Assy.
DK Assy.
144 Bed
151-1/2
151-1/4
152-1/4
159
149-1/8
149-1/8
150-3/8
157-1/4
305
306
309
323
O.A. Belt Length
Option:
O.A.L.
12 Nose Over
+ 3
+6
22 Nose Over
+ 3 3/8
+6 3/4
*Roller Centers POR and DK

2
3
None
POR
POR / DK
POR / DK
(extended)
TE Type
4TE
5TE
6TE
6NTE
*Applies to (RB) Roller Belt conveyor only
Options:
1). 12 Nose Over

2). 22 Nose Over
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures

15). Bottom Covers
Page 7
December, 11
Fig 7: Belt Power Feeder Up Service Bed: (Belt PF Up Service Bed)
NOMINAL
CONVEYOR WIDTH
BED LENGTH
(see chart)
6 1/4"
8 7/16"
4" DIA.
TERMINAL END
"
2 1/2
PIVOT POINT LOCATION
INCLINE BELT CONVEYOR

(DRIVER BED)
15
REF. ONLY
*Fig. 7R shown, 7L opposite
Components:
Terminal Pulley: 4" dia. crowned face, 1 3/16" dia. C hubs.
Slave Pulleys: 5" dia. crowned face, 1 3/16" dia. D hubs.
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Entry Section
18", 24", 30" and 36"
Notes:
1. Bed length is a factor of nominal width. (See Bed/Belt Length Chart below)
Nominal Width
1
Bed Length
Overall Length
Required Belt Length
18"
24"
30"
36"
30"
45 13/16"
100"
36"
51 13/16"
112"
42"
57 13/16"
124"
48"
63 13/16"
136"
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
SB
Figure
7
Width
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
See
Note 1
Options:
Taperlock Hubs
POR and DK
None
Pulleys
Sprocket
Both
None
POR
POR / DK
POR / DK
(extended)

12). Gap Bar
7). Delete POR & DK Assembly @ Terminal End 14). Split Taper Bushings & Hubs
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
TE Type
4TE
Drive Specific Data

Pulley Face Hand Slave Speed Ratio
Std.
MC
R
L
1.0:1
1.3:1
15). Bottom Covers
Page 8
December, 11
Fig 8: Belt Power Feeder Down Service Bed: (Belt PF Down Service Bed)
NOMINAL
CONVEYOR WIDTH
BED LENGTH
(see chart)
2 1/2"
8 7/1
6 1/4"
6"
DECLINE BELT CONVEYOR

(DRIVER BED)
15
PIVOT POINT LOCATION
REF. ONLY
*Fig. 8R shown, 8L opposite
Components:
Terminal Pulley: 4" dia. crowned face, 1 3/16" dia. C hubs.
Slave Pulleys: 5" dia. crowned face, 1 3/16" dia. D hubs.
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Exit Section
18", 24", 30" and 36"
Notes:
1. Bed length is a factor of nominal width. (See Bed/Belt Length Chart below)
Nominal Width
1
Bed Length
Overall Length
18"
24"
30"
36"
30"
45 13/16"
100"
36"
51 13/16"
112"
42"
57 13/16"
124"
48"
63 13/16"
136"
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
SB
Figure
8
Width
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
See
Note 1
Options:
Taperlock Hubs
POR and DK
None
Pulleys
Sprocket
Both
None
POR
POR / DK
POR / DK
(extended)

12). Gap Bar
7). Delete POR & DK Assembly @ Terminal End 14). Split Taper Bushings & Hubs
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
TE Type
4TE
Drive Specific Data

Pulley Face Hand Slave Speed Ratio
Std.
MC
R
L
1.0:1
1.3:1
15). Bottom Covers
Page 9
December, 11
Fig 20: Belt Bed:
*Slide Bed (SB) conveyor class shown.
Components:
Rollers: 1 7/8" dia. Roller with 7/16" hex axle and axle isolators.
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Intermediate Bed
Section
18", 24", 30", 36", 42" and 48"
Roller Centers:
Notes:
1. Additional belt may be required for options selected.
2. Slider Bed (SB) is available in lengths from 12" to 144" (in 6" increments). Roller Bed (RB) is available in
lengths from 36" to 144" (in 6 increments).
3. All carrying rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
Base
With 12 Nose Over
With 22 Nose Over
144"
288"
147"
294"
147 3/8"
294 3/4"
Overall Length
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Figure
20
Width
SB
SBI
RB
18
24
30
36
42
48
*Applies to (RB) Roller Belt conveyor only.
Options:
1). 12 Nose Over

2). 22 Nose Over
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
Bed Length
See
Note 3
*Roller Centers
6
9

15). Bottom Covers
Page 10
December, 11
Fig 21: Belt Swing Take Up Bed: (Belt STU Bed)
Components:
Technical Data:
Section
18", 24", 30", 36", 42" and 48"
Roller Centers:
Notes:
2. Available in lengths from 72" to 144" (in 6" increments).
Base
With 12 Nose Over
With 22 Nose Over
144"
292"
147"
298"
147 3/8"
298 3/4"
Overall Length
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Figure
21
Width
SB
SBI
RB
18
24
30
36
42
48
Options:
1). 12 Nose Over

2). 22 Nose Over
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
Bed Length
See
Note 2
*Roller Centers
6
9
15). Bottom Covers
Page 11
December, 11
Fig 22: Belt Horizontal Take Up Bed: (Belt HTU Bed)
Components:
Pulley: 5 dia. crowed face 1 3/16 dia. C hubs
Technical Data:
Section
18", 24", 30", 36", 42" and 48"
Roller Centers:
Notes:
Overall Length
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Figure
22
Base
With 12 Nose Over
With 22 Nose Over
144"
335"
147"
341"
147 3/8"
341 3/4"
Width
SB
SBI
RB
18
24
30
36
42
48
Options:
1). 12 Nose Over

2). 22 Nose Over
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
Bed Length
108
144
*Roller Centers Taperlock Hubs

6
9
None
Pulleys

9). Manual Take Up for CD / HTU
10). Short Take Up Springs

15). Bottom Covers
Page 12
December, 11
Fig 30: Belt Center Drive Bed: (Belt CD Bed)
*Fig. 30R (Slider Bed (SB)) with chain drive shown, 30L opposite
Components:
Drive: 6, 8 or 10 Center Drive (CD)
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Intermediate Bed /
Drive Bed Section
18", 24", 30", 36", 42" and 48"
Roller Center:
(See Section 3:Components and Accessories for description and available options)
Rollers: 1 7/8 dia. roller with 7/16 hex axle and axle isolators
Notes:
1. Center Drive and take up springs are field installed units.
Drive Size
6CD
8CD
10CD
335"
339"
344"
Important: You must include the

corresponding drive train data sheet from
Section 1: Application and Technical Data
Section.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv.
Class
Figure
30
Width
Bed
Length
SB
SBI
RB
18
108
24
144
30
36
42
48
Options:

Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
*Roller
Centers
Taperlock
Hubs
Pulley Face
6
9
None
Sprockets
Std.
MC
Drive Specific Data
Pulley
Dia.
Train
Hand
HP
AutoFreq (VFD)
6CD
8CD
10CD
Chain
Belt
Direct
R
L
.75
1.0
None
230V
460V
To select correct options, complete and return the

horsepower calculations and drive train data sheet.

13). Brake Motor ( N/A with speeds > 240 fpm)

15). Bottom Covers
Page 13
December, 11
Fig 32: Belt Center Drive Terminal Bed - Entry: (Belt CD TE Bed)
Components:
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Entry Bed / Drive
Bed Section
18", 24", 30", 36", 42" and 48"
Roller Center:
Notes:
Belt Length
Terminal End
Assembly
Overall
Length
Length without
POR & DK Assy
6CD
8CD
10CD
4TE
5TE
6TE
6NTE
151 3/8"
151 3/32"
152 1/4"
N/A
149 1/16"
149 1/16"
150 3/8"
N/A
348"
349"
352"
366"
352"
353"
356"
370"
357"
358"
361"
375"
*Roller
Centers
Taperlock
Hubs
POR and
DK
None
Pulleys
Sprockets
Both
None
POR
POR / DK
POR / DK
(extended)

corresponding drive train data
sheet from Section 1: Application
and Technical Data Section.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv.
Class
Figure
32
Width
Bed
Length
SB
SBI
RB
18
108
24
144
30
36
42
48
Options:

Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
6
9
TE Type
4TE
5TE
6TE
6NTE

Pulley
Face
Pulley
Dia.
Std.
MC
6CD
8CD
10CD
Drive Specific Data

Train
Hand
HP
Chain
Belt
Direct
R
L
.75
1.0
AutoFreq
(VFD)
None
230V
460V


15). Bottom Covers
Page 14
December, 11
Fig 33: Belt Center Drive Terminal Bed - Exit: (Belt CD TE Bed)
Components:
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Exit Bed / Drive
Bed Section
18", 24", 30", 36", 42" and 48"
Roller Center:
Notes:
1. Drive belt pull may limit available TE type.
Belt Length
Terminal End
Assembly
Overall
Length
Length without
POR & DK Assy
6CD
8CD
10CD
4TE
5TE
6TE
6NTE
151 3/8"
151 3/32"
152 1/4"
N/A
149 1/16"
149 1/16"
150 3/8"
N/A
348"
349"
352"
366"
352"
353"
356"
370"
357"
358"
361"
375"
*Roller
Centers
Taperlock
Hubs
POR and
DK
TE Type
None
Pulleys
Sprockets
Both
None
POR
POR / DK
POR / DK
(extended)
4TE
5TE
6TE
6NTE
6TEHD

corresponding drive train data
sheet from Section 1: Application
and Technical Data Section.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv.
Class
Figure
33
Width
Bed
Length
SB
SBI
RB
18
108
24
144
30
36
42
48
Options:

Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
6
9

Pulley
Face
Pulley
Dia.
Std.
MC
6CD
8CD
10CD
Drive Specific Data

Train
Hand
HP
Chain
Belt
Direct
R
L
.75
1.0
AutoFreq
(VFD)
None
230V
460V


15). Bottom Covers
Page 15
December, 11
Fig 40: Belt End Drive Bed: (Belt DE Bed)
Components:
Drive: 6 or 8End Drive (ED)
Technical Data:
Bed Section
18", 24", 30", 36", 42" and 48"
Roller Center:
Notes:
options selected.
3. Available bed lengths from 36" to
144" (in 6" increments)
corresponding drive train data sheet
from Section 1: Application and
Technical Data Section.

Drive End
Overall Length
Assembly
6DE
152 1/4"
8DE
155 5/16"
6NDE
N/A"
8NDE
N/A
Overall Length
Modifiers
Length without
POR & DK Assy
150 3/8"
152 7/8"
N/A
N/A
Option:
12 Nose Over
22 Nose Over
O.A.L.
+ 3"
+ 3 3/8"
Belt Length
306"
312"
319"
324"
O.A. Belt Length
+ 6"
+ 6 3/4"
How to Specify:
Conv.
Bed
*Roller Taperlock POR and
3
Qty. Class Figure Width Length Centers
Hubs
DK
40
SB
18
6
None
None
See
SBI
24
9
Pulleys
POR
Note 3
RB
30
Sprockets POR / DK
36
Both
42
48
Options:
1). 12 Nose Over

2). 22 Nose Over
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
Pulley
Face
Pulley
Dia.
Std.
MC
6DE
8DE
6NDE
8NDE

Drive Specific Data

Train
Hand
Mount
HP
Chain
Belt
Direct
R
L
Side (SM)
Under (UM)
.75
1.0
AutoFreq
(VFD)
None
230V
460V


15). Bottom Covers
Page 16
December, 11
Fig 41: Belt End Drive Swing Take Up Bed: (Belt DE STU Bed)
Components:
Drive: 6 or 8End Drive (ED)
Technical Data:
Bed Section
18", 24", 30" and 36"
Roller Center:
Notes:
options selected.
3. Available bed lengths from 72" to
144" (in 6" increments)
corresponding drive train data sheet
from Section 1: Application and
Technical Data Section.

Drive End
Overall Length
Assembly
6DE
152 1/4"
8DE
155 5/16"
6NDE
N/A"
8NDE
N/A
Overall Length
Modifiers
Length without
POR & DK Assy
150 3/8"
152 7/8"
N/A
N/A
Option:
12 Nose Over
22 Nose Over
O.A.L.
+ 3"
+ 3 3/8"
Belt Length
310"
316"
323"
328"
O.A. Belt Length
+ 6"
+ 6 3/4"
How to Specify:
Conv.
Bed
*Roller Taperlock POR and
3
Qty. Class Figure Width Length Centers
Hubs
DK
41
SB
18
6
None
None
See
SBI
24
9
Sprockets
POR
Note 3
RB
30
POR / DK
36
Pulley
Face
Pulley
Dia.
Std.
MC
6DE
8DE
6NDE
8NDE
Drive Specific Data

Train
Hand
Mount
HP
Chain
Belt
Direct
R
L
Side (SM)
Under (UM)
.75
1.0
AutoFreq
(VFD)
None
230V
460V

Options:
1). 12 Nose Over

2). 22 Nose Over
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures


15). Bottom Covers
Page 17
December, 11
Fig 42: Brake Belt:
*Fig. 42R with chain drive shown, 42L opposite
Components:
Terminal Pulley: 4 dia. crowned face, 1 3/16 dia. C hubs.
Drive Pulley: 6 dia. crowned face, vulcanized lagged, 1 3/16 dia. TL hubs.
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Brake Belt Bed /
Drive Bed Section
18", 24", 30" and 36"
Notes:
1. All return rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings.
2. Available in bed lengths from 72" to 144" (in 6" increments).
Bed Length
Belt Length
Required
Base
72"
108"
144"
179"
251"
323"
87 7/8"
123 7/8"
159 7/8"
Overall Length without POR and DK

at Terminal
at Drive End at TE and Drive
End (opt. 7)
(opt. 8)
End
85 1/2"
85 7/8"
83 1/2"
121 1/2"
121 7/8"
119 1/2"
157 1/2"
157 7/8"
155 1/2"
Important: You must

include
the
corresponding drive
train data sheet from
Section 1: Application
and Technical Data
Section.
How to Specify:
Conv.
Bed Taperlock POR and TE Type
Qty. Class Figure Width Length2 Hubs
DK
SB
42
4TE
18
None
None
See
24
POR
Note 2 Sprockets
30
POR / DK
36
POR / DK
(extended)
Pulley
Face
Std.
MC
Pulley
Dia.
6DE
Drive Specific Data

Train
Hand
Mount
HP
Chain
Belt
Direct
R
L
Side (SM)
Under (UM)
.75
1.0
AutoFreq
(VFD)
None
230V
460V

Options:

8). Delete POR & DK Assy @ Drive End
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
13). Brake Motor ( N/A with speeds > 240 fpm) 15). Bottom Covers
Page 18
December, 11
Fig 43: Brake Spacer Belt:
*Fig. 43R with chain drive shown, 43L opposite
Components:
Terminal Pulley: 4 dia. crowned face, 1 3/16 dia. C hubs.
Drive Pulley: 6 dia. crowned face, vulcanized lagged, 1 3/16 dia. TL hubs.
Slave Pulley: 5 dia. crowned face, 1 3/16 dia. TL hubs
Notes:
1. Standard speed change ratio provided with brake spacer unit 2:1
2. All return rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
3. Available in bed lengths from 72" to 144" (In 6" increments).
Technical Data:
Bed Type: Brake Belt Bed /
Drive Bed Section
18", 24", 30" and 36"
Slave Speed Ratio Options:

1:1
1.3:1
1.6:1
1.1:1
1.4:1
1.7:1
1.2:1
1.5:1
1.8:1
1.9:1
2:1

Bed Length
Belt Length
Required
Base
72"
108"
144"
175"
247"
319"
135 1/8"
171 1/8"
207 1/8"
Important: You must

include
the
corresponding drive
train data sheet from
Section 1: Application
and Technical Data
Section.
Overall Length without POR and DK

at Terminal
at Drive End at TE and Drive
End (opt. 7)
(opt. 8)
End
132 1/2"
132 7/8"
130 1/2"
168 1/2"
168 7/8"
166 1/2"
204 1/2"
204 7/8"
202 1/2"
How to Specify:
Conv.
Bed Taperlock POR and
Qty. Class Figure Width Length3 Hubs
DK
SB
43
18
None
None
See
24
POR
Note 3 Sprockets
30
POR / DK
36
POR / DK
(extended)
TE
Type
4TE
Pulley Pulley
Face
Dia.
6DE
Std.
MC
Train
Chain
Belt
Direct
Drive Specific Data

Slave Speed
Hand
Mount
Ration
See
Chart
above
R
L
HP
Side (SM) .75

Under (UM) 1.0
AutoFreq
(VFD)
None
230V
460V

Options:

8). Delete POR & DK Assy @ Drive End
Section 2:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Figures
12). Gap Bar

15). Bottom Covers
Page 19
December, 11
Belt Conveyor
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
6CD, 8CD & 10CD: 6", 8" &10" Chain / Belt & Sprocket Driven Center Drives ...................... 3
6CD, 8CD & 10CD: 6", 8" &10" Direct Drive Center Drive Assemblies................................... 4
6CD Drive Train (Data Sheet).................................................................................................................................... 5
8CD Drive Train (Data Sheet).................................................................................................................................... 5
10CD Drive Train (Data Sheet).................................................................................................................................. 6
6DE: 6" Chain / Belt and Sprocket End Drive Assembly......................................................... 7

6DE: 6" Direct Drive End Drive Assembly ................................................................................ 8
6DE Drive Train with Under Mount Drive (Data Sheet) .............................................................................................9
6DE Drive Train with Side Mount Drive (Data Sheet)................................................................................................9
8DE: 8" Chain / Belt and Sprocket End Drive Assembly....................................................... 10

8DE: 8" Direct Drive End Drive Assembly .............................................................................. 11
8DE Drive Train with Under Mount Drive (Data Sheet) ...........................................................................................12
6DE Drive Train with Side Mount Drive (Data Sheet)..............................................................................................12
6NDE: 6" End Drive Nose Over Assembly.............................................................................. 13

6NDE Drive Train with Under Mount Drive (Data Sheet).........................................................................................14
6NDE Drive Train with Side Mount Drive (Data Sheet) ...........................................................................................14
8NDE: 8" End Drive Nose Over Assembly.............................................................................. 15

8NDE Drive Train with Under Mount Drive (Data Sheet).........................................................................................16
8NDE Drive Train with Side Mount Drive (Data Sheet) ...........................................................................................16
4TE: 4" Terminal End Assembly.............................................................................................. 17

6TEHD: 6" Terminal End Heavy Duty Assembly .................................................................... 20
6NTE: 6" Terminal End Nose Over Assembly ........................................................................ 21
6TEIG: 6" Terminal End with Impulse Generator Assembly ................................................. 22
12NO: 12 Nose Over................................................................................................................ 23
22NO: 22 Nose Over................................................................................................................ 23
55ASP: Adjustable Slave Pulleys ............................................................................................ 24
CRBH: Carring Roller ............................................................................................................... 25
SBRRBH: Slider Bed Return Roller......................................................................................... 25
SBPORBO: Slider Bed Pop-Out Roller (Oiled Bearing)......................................................... 26
HTU: Horizontal Take Up.......................................................................................................... 27
STU: Swing Take Up................................................................................................................. 28
2PD: 2 Pulley Dump.................................................................................................................. 29
A3PS: Adjustable 3 Pulley Splice............................................................................................ 30
TUS: Take Up Springs .............................................................................................................. 31
TW: Turning Wheel ................................................................................................................... 31
TEC: Terminal End Cover ........................................................................................................ 32
FBC: Full Bottom Cover ........................................................................................................... 32
DCB: Diagonal Crossbracing .................................................................................................. 33
GB: Gap Bar .............................................................................................................................. 33
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 2
December, 11
6CD, 8CD & 10CD: 6, 8 &10 Chain / Belt & Sprocket Driven Center Drives
Components:
Vulcanized Lagged Drive Pulley: (CD Type)
(6CD) 6 dia. crowned face with 1-7/16 dia. cold finished shaft, w
elded
construction.
(8CD) 8 dia. crowned face with 1 7/16 dia. Fatigue Proof shaft, QD
bushings.
(10CD) 10 dia. crowned face with 1 11/16 dia. Fatigue Proof shaft,
QD bushings.
Take-Up Pulley:
5 dia. crowned face, with greased for life internal bearings for a
1-3/16 dia. shaft.
Springs: (Effective belt take-up)
Long Springs (18)
Short Springs (8)
Manual take-up (optional): 30 effective belt take-up.
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:
(6CD) 375# effective belt pull
(10 CD) 900# effective belt pull
Belt Length Modifiers:

(6CD) + 3-11 per unit
Maximum Spring Quantities:

Width Springs
Width
Springs
18
24
30
5
7
9
36
42
48
11
13
15
Chain and Belt Driven Train - Nominal Speed at 60 Hz. (FPM) for 6CD, 8CD, and 10CD
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
Notes:
1. Minimum number of springs is (2); maximum number is dependant on the nominal width. (see Maximum Spring
Quantities chart above) Use an automatic take-up with long springs whenever possible, and short springs when
space is limited. If space constraints still exist use a manual take-up.
2. Motor drip pan included.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv
Class
Model
Nominal
Width
Drive
Hand
18
24
30
36
42
48
L
R
FPM
HP
Motor Drive
Drive
Train
Sprocket
Hub Type
Pulley
Face
Belt
Chain
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
Take-Up
Brake
Motor
BC
6CD
8CD
10CD
Section 3:
Refer to
Drive Train
Data Sheet
(Page 5 & 6)
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

None
Soft St
AF230V
AF460V
Min.
2S*
2L*
Max.
15S
15L
Manual
*S-Short Springs
*L-Long Springs
Y
N
Page 3
December, 11
6CD, 8CD & 10CD: 6, 8 & 10 Direct Drive Center Drive Assemblies
Components:
(6CD) 6 dia. crowned face with 1-7/16 dia. cold finished shaft, welded
construction.
bushings.
(10CD) 10 dia. crowned face with 1 11/16 dia. Fatigue Proof shaft,
QD bushings.
Take-Up Pulley:
1-3/16 dia. shaft.
Long Springs (18)
Short Springs (8)
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:


Width Springs
Width
Springs
18
24
30
5
7
9
36
42
48
11
13
15
Direct Drive Train - Nominal Speed at 60 Hz. (FPM)

6CD
8CD
10CD
60
60
100
80
80
120
100
100
160
120
120
190
160
160
240
200
200
320
260
260
320
320
Notes:
1. Minimum number of springs is (2); maximum number is dependant on nominal width (See Maximum Spring
Quantities chart above.
2. Use an automatic take-up with long springs whenever possible. If space restrictions prohibit the use of this,
an automatic take-up with short springs should be used. Only if the physical space is too small for an
automatic take-up, should a manual take-up be used.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv
Class
Model
Nominal
Width
Drive
Hand
18
24
30
36
42
48
L
R
FPM
HP
Motor Drive
Drive
Train
Sprocket
Hub Type
Pulley
Face
Belt
Chain
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
Take-Up
Brake
Motor
BC
6CD
8CD
10CD
Section 3:
Refer to
Drive Train
Data Sheet
(Page 5 & 6)
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

None
Soft St
AF230V
AF460V
Min.
2S*
2L*
Max.
15S
15L
Manual
*S-Short Springs
*L-Long Springs
Y
N
Page 4
December, 11
The following data applies to the all of the drive trains listed below:
Specifictations:
Baldor Motor: 1725 RPM,
Notes:
1. Machine crowned pulleys required for conveyor speeds greater than
240 fpm.
2. Chain drive sprockets are only available with split taper bushings and
hubs at speeds greater than 240 fpm.
3. Belt drive train sprockets available with split taper bushings and hubs
only.
4. Important: You must include the corresponding drive train data
sheet with all drives specified.
TEFC, less base, 208230/460/3HP/60Hz with
Baldor C-Flange reducers.

1/2 Hp 56 C frame
3/4 Hp 56 C frame
1 Hp 56 C frame
1-1/2 Hp 145TC frame
2 Hp 145 TC frame
3 Hp 182TC frame
5 Hp 184TC frame
6CD Drive Train (Data Sheet)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
6CD
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
.75
1.0
1.5
60-200 in 10 fpm increments

Options:
13). Brake Motor
14). Split Tapered Bushing and Hubs
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
8CD
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
D Direct Drive
1.5
2.0
3.0

Options:
13). Brake Motor
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 5
December, 11
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
10CD
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
D Direct Drive
2.0
3.0
5.0

Options:
13). Brake Motor
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 6
December, 11
6DE: 6 Chain / Belt and Sprocket End Drive Assembly
6DEUM
6DESM
Right Hand Shown, Left Hand Opposite
Components:
Lagged Drive Pulley: (CD Type)
6 dia. crowned face with 1 3/16 dia. cold finished shaft, welded
construction.
End Plate:
7 ga. galvanized end plates.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:
375# effective belt pull.

+ 1-6 per unit
End drive is typically ordered as part of a bed assembly, however, it may be ordered separately.
This assembly requires its major components to be assembled to an intermediate bed assembly.
In trash conveyor applications do not select pop out roller or drop kit.
2 1/4 snub roller included.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv
Class
Model
Nominal
Width
Drive
Hand
18
24
30
36
42
48
L
R
FPM
HP
Motor Drive
Sprocket
Hub Type
Pulley
Face
Brake
Motor
Pop-Out
3
Roller
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
Y
N
Y
N
Drop Kit
BC
6DE-SM
6DE-UM
6NDE-SM
6NDE-UM
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Refer to
Drive Train
Data Sheet
(Page 9)
None
Soft St
AF230V
AF460V
GV1 - 2.5 GV
GV2 3.5 GV
LR1
LS1
Page 7
December, 11
6DE: 6 Direct Drive End Drive Assembly
6DE
6NDE
Components:
construction.
End Plate:
60
6DE
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:

(6DE)+ 1-6 per unit
(6NDE)+ 2-8 per unit
Direct Drive Train Nominal Speed at 60 Hz. (FPM)

80
100
120
160
200
260
320
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv
Class
Model
Nominal
Width
Drive
Hand
18
24
30
36
42
48
L
R
FPM
HP
Motor Drive
Sprocket
Hub Type
Pulley
Face
Brake
Motor
Pop-Out
3
Roller
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
Y
N
Y
N
Drop Kit
BC
6DE-SM
6NDE-SM
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Refer to
Drive Train
Data Sheet
(Page 9)
None
Soft St
AF230V
AF460V
GV1 - 2.5 GV
GV2 3.5 GV
LR1
LS1
Page 8
December, 11
Specifictations:
Notes:
240 fpm.
3. High speed rollers required for speeds of 180 fpm or greater.
only.

1/2 Hp 56 C frame
3/4 Hp 56 C frame
1 Hp 56 C frame
2 Hp 145 TC frame
3 Hp 182TC frame
5 Hp 184TC frame
6DE Drive Train with Under Mount Drive (Data Sheet)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
6DEUM
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
.75
1.0
1.5

Options:
13). Brake Motor
6DE Drive Train with Side Mount Drive (Data Sheet)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
6DESM
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
D Direct Drive
.75
1.0
1.5

Options:
13). Brake Motor
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 9
December, 11
8DE: 8 Chain / Belt and Sprocket End Drive Assembly
8DEUM
8DESM
Components:
Lagged Drive Pulley:
8 dia. crowned face with 1 7/16 dia. Fatigue-Proof shaft, QD bushings.
End Plate:
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:

+ 2-0 per unit
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv
Class
Model
Nominal
Width
Drive
Hand
18
24
30
36
42
48
L
R
FPM
HP
Motor Drive
Sprocket
Hub Type
Pulley
Face
Brake
Motor
Pop-Out
3
Roller
None
Soft St
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
Y
N
Y
N
Drop Kit
BC
8DE-SM
8DE-UM
8NDE-SM
8NDE-UM
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Refer to
Drive Train
Data Sheet
(Page 12)
GV1 - 2.5 GV
GV2 3.5 GV
LR1
LS1
Page 10
December, 11
8DE: 8 Direct Drive End Drive Assembly
8DE
8NDE
Components:
Lagged Drive Pulley:
8 dia. crowned face with 1 7/16 dia. Fatigue-Proof shaft, QD bushings.
End Plate:
60
8DE
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:

(8DE) + 2-0 per unit
(8NDE) + 3-1 per unit
Direct Drive Train Nominal Speed at 60 Hz. (FPM)

80
100
120
160
200
260
320
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv
Class
Model
Nominal
Width
Drive
Hand
18
24
30
36
42
48
L
R
FPM
HP
Motor Drive
Sprocket
Hub Type
Pulley
Face
Brake
Motor
Pop-Out
3
Roller
None
Soft St
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
Y
N
Y
N
Drop Kit
BC
8DE-SM
8NDE-SM
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Refer to
Drive Train
Data Sheet
(Page 12)
GV1 - 2.5 GV
GV2 3.5 GV
LR1
LS1
Page 11
December, 11
Specifictations:
Notes:
240 fpm.
only.

1/2 Hp 56 C frame
3/4 Hp 56 C frame
1 Hp 56 C frame
2 Hp 145 TC frame
3 Hp 182TC frame
5 Hp 184TC frame
8DE Drive Train with Under Mount Drive (Data Sheet)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
8DEUM
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
1.5
2.0
3.0

Options:
13). Brake Motor
6DE Drive Train with Side Mount Drive (Data Sheet)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
8DESM
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
1.5
2.0
3.0

Options:
13). Brake Motor
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 12
December, 11
6NDE: 6 End Drive Nose Over Assembly
6NDEUM
6NDESM
Components:
construction.
End Plate:
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:
Conveyor Widths:
18, 24, 30 and 36

+ 2-7 per unit
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
For trash conveyor applications select option no. 8. (Delete POR and DK assembly at end drive unit).
2 1/4 snub roller included with end drive unit.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
6NDE
Width
Drive Side
Drive Mount
Drive Train
18
24
30
36
R-Right
L-Left
UM
SM
Supply copy of
drive train
data sheet
(Page 14)
Options:
Section 3:
8). Delete POR & DK Assembly @ Drive End
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

13). Brake Motor

14). Split Taper Bushings & Hubs
Page 13
December, 11
Notes:
240 fpm.
3. High speed rollers required for speeds of 180 fpm or greater.
only.
Specifictations:

1/2 Hp 56 C frame
3/4 Hp 56 C frame
1 Hp 56 C frame
2 Hp 145 TC frame
3 Hp 182TC frame
5 Hp 184TC frame
6NDE Drive Train with Under Mount Drive (Data Sheet)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
6NDEUM
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
.75
1.0
1.5

Options:
13). Brake Motor
6NDE Drive Train with Side Mount Drive (Data Sheet)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
6NDESM
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
.75
1.0
1.5

Options:
13). Brake Motor
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 14
December, 11
8NDE: 8 End Drive Nose Over Assembly
8NDEUM
8NDESM
Components:
8 dia. crowned face with 1 7/16 dia. Fatigue-Proof shaft and QD
bushings.
End Plate:
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:
Conveyor Widths:
18, 24, 30 and 36

+ 3-0 per unit
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
For trash conveyor applications select option no. 8. (Delete POR and DK assembly at end drive unit).
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
8NDE
Width
Drive Side
Drive Mount
Drive Train
18
24
30
36
R-Right
L-Left
UM
SM
Supply copy of
drive train
data sheet
(Next page)
Options:
Section 3:
8). Delete POR & DK Assembly @ Drive End
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

13). Brake Motor

Page 15
December, 11
Notes:
240 fpm.
only.
Specifictations:

1/2 Hp 56 C frame
3/4 Hp 56 C frame
1 Hp 56 C frame
2 Hp 145 TC frame
3 Hp 182TC frame
5 Hp 184TC frame
8NDE Drive Train with Under Mount Drive (Data Sheet)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
8NDEUM
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
1.5
2.0
3.0

Options:
13). Brake Motor
8NDE Drive Train with Side Mount Drive (Data Sheet)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Drive Type
8NDESM
Drive Hand
Drive Train Type
HP
Speed (fpm)
Left
Right
B Belt Drive Train

C Chain Drive Train
1.5
2.0
3.0

Options:
13). Brake Motor
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 16
December, 11
4TE: 4 Terminal End Assembly

Components:
Pulley:
4 dia. Crowned face with greased
for life internal bearings for a
1 3/16 dia. shaft
Rollers (Pop-out):
1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga. with 7/16 hex
axle.
Rollers (Snub):
2 1/4 dia. x 11 ga. with 1 dia.
shaft
End Plates:
7 ga. Galvanized end plates
Technical Data:
Conveyor Widths: (O.A.W.)
18, 24, 30, 36, 42 and 48
Drive Capacity:

1-1 required per unit.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Terminal end is typically ordered as part of a bed assembly, however, it may be ordered separately.
For trash conveyor applications select option no. 7. (Delete POR and DK assembly at terminal end).
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
4TE
Width
18
24
30
36
42
48
Options:
Section 3:
7). Delete POR & DK Assembly @ Terminal End
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 17
December, 11
5TE: 5 Terminal End Assembly

Components:
Pulley:
5 dia. plain crowned face with
1 3/16 dia. D hubs.
Rollers (Pop-out):
1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga. with 7/16 hex
axle.
Rollers (Snub):
shaft
End Plates:
7 ga. galvanized end plates
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42 and 48
Drive Capacity:

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
5TE
Width
18
24
30
36
42
48
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 18
December, 11
6TE: 6" Terminal End Assembly

Components:
Pulley:
1 7/16 dia. D hubs.
Rollers (Pop-out):
1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga. with 7/16 hex
axle.
Rollers (Snub):
shaft
End Plates:
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42 and 48
Drive Capacity:

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
6TE
Width
18
24
30
36
42
48
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 19
December, 11
6TEHD: 6 Terminal End Heavy Duty Assembly

Components:
Pulley:
1 11/16 dia. D hubs.
Rollers (Pop-out):
1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga. with 7/16 hex
axle.
Rollers (Snub):
shaft
End Plates:
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42 and 48
Drive Capacity:

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
6TEHD
Width
18
24
30
36
42
48
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 20
December, 11
6NTE: 6 Terminal End Nose Over Assembly

Components:
Pulley:
1 3/16 dia. D hubs.
Rollers (Pop-out):
1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga. with 7/16 hex
axle.
Rollers (Snub):
shaft
End Plates:
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Drive Capacity:

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
This assembly is not recommended for use in a trash conveyor application.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
6NTE
Width
18
24
30
36
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 21
December, 11
6TEIG: 6 Terminal End with Impulse Generator Assembly

Components:
Pulley:
1 7/16 dia. D hubs.
Rollers (Pop-out):
1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga. with 7/16 hex
axle.
Rollers (Snub):
2 1/4 dia. x 11 ga. With 1 dia.
shaft
End Plates:
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42 and 48"
Drive Capacity:

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sprockets, chain, and chain guard are not specified as part of this assembly.
This assembly is not recommended for use in a trash conveyor application.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
6TEIG
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Width
Drive Side
18
24
30
36
42
48
R-Right
L-Left
Page 22
December, 11
12NO: 12 Nose Over

Components:
Rollers (Snub):
2 1/4 dia. x 11 ga. with 1 dia. Shaft.
Side Plates:
7 ga. galvanized side plates.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42 and 48

6 required per unit.
Notes:
1. Minimum angle of adjustment: 7 1/2
2. Maximum angle of adjustment: 17 1/2
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
12NO
Width
18
24
30
36
42
48
22NO: 22 Nose Over

Components:
Rollers (Snub):
2 1/4 dia. x 11 ga. with 1 dia. shaft.
Side Plates:
7 ga. galvanized side plates.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42 and 48

6 3/4 required per unit.
Notes:
1. Minimum angle of adjustment: 17 1/2
2. Maximum angle of adjustment: 27 1/2
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
BC
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Model
22NO
Width
Drive Side
18
24
30
36
42
48
R-Right
L-Left
Page 23
December, 11
55ASP: Adjustable Slave Pulleys

Components:
Pulley:
1 3/16 dia. D hubs.
Side Plates:
7 ga. galvanized side plates
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36

Right hand shown, Left hand opposite.
Notes:
1. Terminal end is typically ordered as part of a bed assembly, however, it may be ordered separately.
2. This assembly requires its major components to be assembled to an intermediate bed assembly.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
55ASP
Width
Drive Side
Drive Train
18
24
30
36
R-Right
L-Left
1:1
1:1.3
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 24
December, 11
CRBH: Carring Roller

Components:
Tubing:
1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga. galvanized
steel tubing.
Axle:
7/16 steel hex, spring retained.
CT3
CT4
Bearing:
N.O.A.W.
BR
BI
18
15 1/2
16 1/2
15 7/16
15 1/4
16 1/4
15 3/16
24
21 1/2
22 1/2
21 7/16
21 1/4
22 1/4
21 3/16
Technical Data:
30
27 1/2
28 1/2
27 7/16
27 1/4
28 1/4
27 3/16
Capacity:
36
33 1/2
34 1/2
33 7/16
33 1/4
34 1/4
33 3/16
100lbs.
ABEC-1 precision bearing.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
CRBH
Constr. Type
Width
3-CT3
4-CT4
18
24
30
36
SBRRBH: Slider Bed Return Roller

Components:
Tubing:
steel tubing.
Axle:
CT3
CT4
Bearing:
N.O.A.W.
BR
BI
18
15 1/2
16 1/2
15 7/16
15 1/4
16 1/4
15 3/16
24
21 1/2
22 1/2
21 7/16
21 1/4
22 1/4
21 3/16
Technical Data:
30
27 1/2
28 1/2
27 7/16
27 1/4
28 1/4
27 3/16
Capacity:
36
33 1/2
34 1/2
33 7/16
33 1/4
34 1/4
33 3/16
100lbs.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
BC
Model
SBRRBH
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Constr. Type
Width
3-CT3
4-CT4
18"
24"
30"
36"
Page 25
December, 11
SBPORBO: Slider Bed Pop-Out Roller (Oiled Bearing)

Components:
Tubing:
steel tubing.
Axle:
CT3
CT4
Bearing:
N.O.A.W.
BR
BI
18
15 1/2
16 1/2
15 7/16
15 1/4
16 1/4
15 3/16
24
21 1/2
22 1/2
21 7/16
21 1/4
22 1/4
21 3/16
Technical Data:
30
27 1/2
28 1/2
27 7/16
27 1/4
28 1/4
27 3/16
Capacity:
36
33 1/2
34 1/2
33 7/16
33 1/4
34 1/4
33 3/16
100lbs.
Open style, flanged and oiled

conveyor bearing.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
BC
Model
SBPORBO
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Constr. Type
Width
3-CT3
4-CT4
18
24
30
36
Page 26
December, 11
HTU: Horizontal Take Up
Components:
Pulley:
(4HTU): 4 dia. crowned face, C hubs for a 1 3/16 dia. shaft.
(5HTU): 5 dia. crowned face, C hubs for a 1 3/16 dia. shaft.
Rollers (Snub):
2 1/4 dia. x 11 ga. roller with 1 dia. shaft.
Side Frame:
10 ga. formed side channels.
Long Springs (18)
Short Springs (8)
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42 and 48
Take Up:
1-2 3/4 maximum travel

+ 3-11 per unit

Width Springs
Width
Springs
18
24
30
5
7
9
36
42
48
11
13
15
Notes:
1. Min. number of springs is (2); maximum is dependant on the nominal width (see Maximum Spring Quantities
chart above). Use an automatic take-up with long springs when ever possible and short springs when space
is limited. If space constraints still exist, use a manual take-up
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
Width
4HTU
5HTU
18
24
30
36
42
48
Take-Up
Min.
2L*
2S*
Max.
15L
15S
Manual
*L= Long Springs
*S=Short Springs
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 27
December, 11
STU: Swing Take Up
Components:
Pulley:
5 dia. crowned face with greased for life internal bearings for a
1 3/16 dia. shaft.
Rollers (Snub):
2 1/4 dia. x 11 ga. flat face snubber roller with 1 dia. shaft.
Side Frame:
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Take Up:
4 maximum travel

+ 4 per unit
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
STU
Width
18
24
30
36
42
48
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 28
December, 11
2PD: 2 Pulley Dump
1 3/8"
24"
14 7/8"
4 5/8"
14 1/2"
4 1/2"
Nominal Conveyor Width + 3 1/8"
Nominal Conveyor Width +3/8"
1 3/8"
0 - 15 Adjustment
Components:
Pulley:
1 3/16 dia. shaft.
Rollers (Snub):
Side Frame:
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42 and 48
Capacity:
375# effective belt pull
Take Up:
Used for tracking purposes only.

+ 4 per unit
Notes:
1. This unit for trash conveyor use only.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
2PD
Width
18
24
30
36
42
48
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 29
December, 11
A3PS: Adjustable 3 Pulley Splice

1 7/16"
Nominal
Conveyor Width
1 7/16"
36"
155
TC
TC
4 3/4"
15 5/8"
Typ.
TC
12 1/4"
48.3
61.8
Components:
Pulley:
1 3/16 dia. shaft.
Rollers (Snub):
Side Frame:
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Capacity:
*See capacity chart below.
Take Up:
Used for tracking purposes only.

+ 3-9 per unit
Notes:
1. This unit is not recommended for trash conveyor usage.
2. Minimum product length of 8 is required for proper transfer across
this unit.
3. When using mechanical take up, multiply the listed belt pull value
by 0.817
Capacity Chart at 250 FPM

O.A.W.
Effective Belt Pull
18
24
30
36
724#
724#
710#
591#
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
BC
A3PS
Width
18
24
30
36
Options:
Section 3:
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Page 30
December, 11
TUS: Take Up Springs

Components:
Wire:
.162 dia. galvanized wire
x 1 11/16 outside dia.
Coils (Short):
Approximately 75 coils.
Coils (Long):
Approximately 140 coils.
Notes:
1. For use with center drive (CD) take ups and horizontal take up units (HTU) with automatic take up.
2. Long springs are standard. Short springs are to be used in situations with space restrictions.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
TUS
Coil Type
1-Short
2-Long
TW: Turning Wheel

Components:
Wheel:
6 dia. wheel
Bracket:
12 ga. galvanized formed
bracket.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
BC
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Model
TW
Page 31
December, 11
TEC: Terminal End Cover

Components:
Frame:
sheet steel
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Terminal end cover mounted to a 6 Dia. terminal end shown.
Notes:
1. One size fits 4TE, 5TE, and 6TE.
2. When supporting by a ceiling hanger, the saddle support option must be ordered.
3. Not available for TETU components.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
BC
Model
TEC
Width
18
24
30
36
FBC: Full Bottom Cover

Components:
Frame:
steel.
Components:
Conveyor Widths: (O.A.W.):
18, 24, 30 and 36
End
Intermediate
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
BC
Model
FBC
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Style
Width
Bed Length
End
Intermediate
18
24
30
36
42
48
13
19
25
31
37
Page 32
December, 11
DCB: Diagonal Crossbracing
Components:
Thread: (2) 3/8-16 all thread 10-0 long.
Fasteners: (4) 3/8-16 hex nut.
Mounting: (4) Crossbracing brackets and hardware. 3/8-16 all thread 10-0 long.
Notes:
1. Crossbracing to be used to square roller bed sections.
2. Field cut to suit as required at installation.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
DCB
GB: Gap Bar

Components:
Bracket:
sheet steel brackets.
Technical Data:
Conveyor Widths: (O.A.W.):
18, 24, 30 and 36
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
BC
Model
GB
(BC) Belt Conveyor:

Width
Slave Type
18"
24"
30"
36"
55
66
Page 33
December, 11
Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor

Section 1:
Belt Driven Live Roller:

Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
Theory of Operation:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
Typical Applications: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
Capabilities: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Sub-Classes of Live Roller Conveyor: ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4

Sub-Class 1: (AP) Adjustable Pressure Live Roller Conveyor ------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Sub-Class 2-4: Shared Features -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Sub-Class 2: (TA) Transportation Air Live Roller Conveyor ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Sub-Class 3: (PE) Photo-Eye Accumulation Air Live Roller Conveyor --------------------------------------------------------- 6
Sub-Class 4 (SA) Singulation Air Live Roller Conveyor ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Discharge Zone Product Release Options: (PE./.SA Accumulation Conveyor)--------------- 14

Option 1: Air Operated Roller Brake at Discharge --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
Option 2: Air Operated Roller Stop at Discharge----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
Option 3: Brake Belt at Discharge ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
Option 4: Adjustable Pressure Conveyor at Discharge--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
Application Guidelines:-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Technical Data: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Horsepower Calculations: Worksheet ---------------------------------------------------------------------Horsepower Calculations: Formula-------------------------------------------------------------------------Determining the Hand: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Air Supply Calculations:-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section 1:

18
21
24
25
27
28
Page 2
December, 11
The product load in Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor rides directly on a
bed of rollers. Live Roller Conveyor is driven by an 8 wide drive belt that
engages the underside surface of the carrying rollers by a series of
pressure or lifter rollers located beneath the drive belt. Automotion, Inc.
Live Roller Conveyor can be grouped into two categories. Each one
utilizes its own separate and distinct roller assembly to press the drive belt
against the carrying rollers.
The first category is Adjustable Pressure Live Roller (AP), which utilizes a series of cam adjusted pressure roller
assemblies to press the drive belt against the bottom of the carrying rollers. The second category, Transportation Air
Live Roller (TA), Photo-Eye Accumulation Live Roller (PE), and Singulation Air Live Roller (SA), utilizes a series of
pneumatically controlled lifter roller assemblies to press the drive belt against the bottom of the carrying rollers.
The typical applications for Adjustable Pressure Live Roller, Transportation Air, Photo-Eye Accumulation, and
Singulation Air are:
Transportation
To move product from point A to point B
Diverging and merging
Live Roller Conveyor, in conjunction with photo-eyes and merge logic, will efficiently merge product loads
from two separate conveyor lines onto one conveyor line.
Accumulation and Staging (Photo-Eye Accumulation and Singulation Air Only)

When product being transferred from point A to point B is dependent upon point B being able to accept the
product, accumulation conveyor is used. Accumulation conveyor intelligently stages product without human
intervention until point B is able to accept the product.
Capabilities:
Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor can be used with any product load that has a flat, firm bottom surface that is free of
protrusions that could impede the product load from riding over the rollers.
Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor is primarily for horizontal transportation and accumulation of product. It allows
personnel as well as automated accessories to stop, pull, divert or redirect loads to or from a main trunk line, work
station, secondary line or palletizing unit. Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor has a large number of accessories
available to be interfaced and used in conjunction with it.
Section 1:

Page 3
December, 11
Sub-Classes of Live Roller Conveyor:

Sub-Class 1: (AP) Adjustable Pressure Live Roller Conveyor
Basic Design Features:

Adjustable Pressure Live Roller Conveyor consists of a drive, take-up, terminal ends, adjustable cam pressure roller
assemblies, an 8 wide drive belt, carrying rollers, and conveyor frame. Power is achieved via an electric motor and a
reducer. A pulley/shaft assembly is fitted with a sprocket and is chain, or optionally belt, driven. The drive pulley,
which is lagged with a vulcanized coating to increase the coefficient of friction, drives the 8 wide drive belt down the
center of the frame. The belt is fed through the drive pulley and terminal end pulleys and laced together end-to-end to
form a complete loop. Excess slack is removed with a take-up device to maintain proper belt tension. Adjustable
Pressure Live Roller (AP) utilizes a series of cam adjusted pressure roller assemblies located beneath the drive belt to
press the belt into contact with the underside of the carrying rollers.
The pressure roller assemblies utilized on the Adjustable Pressure Live Roller Conveyor are equipped with an
adjustable cam. The height of the pressure roller is adjusted by rotating the cam. The cam is stepped so that as it
rotates the pressure roller moves upward or downward.
The driving force of the belt should be enough to overcome the resistance of the rollers and the product being
conveyed. The heaviest loads should be conveyed without stalling, due to insufficient driving pressure, but with not
so much that the carrying rollers will turn under the product load during an accumulation situation.
However if the product is stopped or blocked in any manner as in minimum pressure accumulation, the friction
between the belt and carrying roller is enough to start the product load moving again once the block on the product
load is removed.
Section 1:

Page 4
December, 11
Sub-Class 2-4: Shared Features
PRODUCT FLOW

Air Actuated Live Roller Conveyor (TA, PE, and SA) consists of a drive, take-up, terminal ends, lifter roller assemblies,
an 8 wide drive belt, carrying rollers, and conveyor frame. Power is achieved via an electric motor and a reducer. A
pulley/shaft assembly is fitted with a sprocket and is chain, or optionally belt, driven. The pulley, which is lagged with
a vulcanized coating to increase the coefficient of friction, drives the 8 wide drive belt down the center of the frame.
The belt is fed through the drive pulleys and terminal end pulleys and laced together end-to-end to form a complete
loop. Excess slack is removed with a take-up device to keep the belt from slipping over the pulleys. Air Actuated Live
Roller Conveyor (TA, PE, and SA) utilizes a series of pneumatically actuated lifter roller assemblies located beneath
the drive belt to press the belt into contact with the underside of the carrying rollers.
A small air actuator is placed beneath each lifter roller assembly. Air is supplied to the actuator, which raises the lifter
rollers and the drive belt. The drive belt turns the carrying rollers. Any product on top of the carrying rollers is
transported down the conveyor. TA, PE, and SA conveyor provides flexibility in belt driven live roller conveyor that
cannot be achieved through the use of the AP class of belt driven live roller conveyor. Air Actuated Live Roller
Conveyor can be supplied in three configurations; Transportation Air Live Roller (TA), Photo-Eye Accumulation Live
Roller, and Singulation Air Live Roller (SA).
Sub-Class 2: (TA) Transportation Air Live Roller Conveyor
Refers to the basic Air Actuated Live Roller Conveyor described above. Transportation Air Conveyor provides a
positive, non-adjustable driving force to the carrying roller assembly for positive transportation of product loads.
Section 1:

Page 5
December, 11
Sub-Class 3: (PE) Photo-Eye Accumulation Air Live Roller Conveyor

In Photo-Eye Accumulation Live Roller Conveyor the driving force is provided in the same fashion as TA except the
air actuators beneath the lifter roller assemblies are grouped together in pre-determined accumulation zone lengths.
The conveyor is equipped with photo-eye sensors and solenoid valves, which are self-contained in a single module to
control product accumulation. The photo-eye senses the presence of product and signals the solenoid valve, which
controls the air supply that inflates or deflates the air actuators located beneath the lifter roller assemblies in the next
upstream accumulation zone. In its normally open mode the actuator lifts the drive belt and the drive belt turns the
carrying rollers. If the line becomes full and a carton or other product load blocks one of the photo-eye modules, air to
the preceding zone is stopped which lowers the lifter roller assemblies and removes the driving force from the zone.
When the product load or carton clears the photo-eye, air is restored to the zone and the driving force is returned.
Automotion Photo-Eye Accumulation Conveyor features an adjustable time delay built into each zone to maintain
uninterrupted driving force until downstream conditions initiates accumulation of product. It releases in standard
singulation mode, but can also release in slug mode via an external PLC signal. In addition, any photo-eye
accumulation sensor can be used to extract and send line condition information to the programmable controller for
use in system control. The conveyors utilize a separate 24VDC power supply for operating the photo-eyes and
solenoid valves.
Principles of Operation:
Conveyor systems are designed to move product from point A to point B. Unfortunately, point B is not always ready
to accept product from point A. When this occurs it is necessary to accumulate product on the conveyor until it can
proceed on to point B. For example, boxes exiting a pick module are typically sent to a fill and seal workstation. If
the boxes are not sealed at the same rate or faster rate than the rate at which they exit the pick module, they will back
up.
The accumulation process cannot begin without downstream conditions that cause the product to stop. The
downstream condition may be operator controlled such as a manual case stop prior to a workstation, or it may be PLC
controlled such as an air-operated brake at a merge. Regardless of how it is controlled, hardware such as a brake
belt, roller brake or case stop which is external to the accumulation process must be employed to actually stop the
first carton or product and drop power to the zone immediately preceding the stopping device. (See Product Load A
in Figure 6A). This portion of conveyor is referred to as the discharge zone
Figure 6A
Adjustable photo-eye must be blocked for a pre-determined number of seconds (.5 to 2 seconds) before lifter rollers drop down.
A PE accumulation conveyor is divided into a series of independent operating zones. Each zone has a series of lifter
roller assemblies. Each lifter roller assembly consists of a lifter roller mounted in a pivoting frame that is raised and
lowered by a low-pressure pneumatic air actuator. When inflated, the lifter roller lifts the conveyor belt in contact with
the carrying rollers providing driving force. A photo-eye sensor located in the next forward, or downstream, zone
controls the operational mode of each preceding zone. In the example, product will accumulate in the discharge zone
and the rest of the accumulation conveyor will continue running until Product Load B (See Figure 7A) reaches and
blocks the photo-eye in the first accumulation zone. The photo-eye will send a signal to a solenoid, deflating the air
actuator beneath the lifter roller assembly. Since the drive belt no longer comes in contact with the carrying rollers in
that zone, product may accumulate with zero line pressure.
Section 1:

Page 6
December, 11
Figure 7A:
Subsequent product such as Product Load C (See Figure 7B) will travel along the conveyor, in the same fashion as
Product Load B. Upon reaching the non-powered zone created by B, product load C will coast to a stop. (See
Figure 7B). Additional product will accumulate in that zone until the photo-eye for that zone remains blocked and
consequently drops out power to the preceding zone.
Figure 7B:
All succeeding items will travel along the conveyor and coast to a halt behind the preceding stopped product load in
the same fashion as product loads B and C (See Figure 7B). Typically, product will coast to a stop and come to rest
behind the preceding product load. Occasionally, due to conveyor speed and load characteristics, gaps may occur
between product loads.
Figure 7C:
Regardless of the length of accumulation and the assortment of product sizes, weights, etc., any number of items can
be accumulated with zero line pressure. (See Figure 7C).
An item will continue its forward travel as long as the next forward, or downstream, zone is clear. Product will
continue to accumulate rearward until the mechanical device stopping the product in the discharge zone is
disengaged.
Photo-eyes, proximity sensors, or other sensing devices are used to determine when the accumulation conveyor is
full. Commonly referred to as full line sensors, they are placed near the entry end of the accumulation conveyor.
Product continues to pass by the sensor until each of the accumulation zones becomes full. When product can no
longer advance and occupy the next zone, it will block the sensor. The PLC will shut down the conveyor feeding into
the accumulation conveyor
Section 1:

Page 7
December, 11
Skewing Photo-Eyes for Sensing Product with Handles or Sloped Ends

Skewed photo-eye sensors are to be used on any Photo-Eye Accumulation (PE) conveyor that will have to convey
totes or other product loads with handles or sloped ends. This type of product load will create gaps between the
bottoms of the items and may cause them to miss a photo-eye sensor when accumulating. (See Figure 8A)
Figure 8A
The skewed photo-eye is the same photo-eye used on standard photo-eye accumulation conveyor. The photo-eye
itself has a self-contained skewing mechanism that is easily adjustable. Skewed photo-eye sensors should be used
only when totes are the predominant product load being conveyed. This would represent a minimum of 80% totes
and the remaining product consisting of various sized cartons.
To accommodate varying conveyor widths and tote sizes, the Automotion photo-eye sensor can remain at zero
degrees (straight across the width of the conveyor) or be skewed 9 or 18 degrees. The following chart is to be used
to determine the skew angle, if any, required to properly accumulate totes on a photo-eye accumulation conveyor.
System Width
18
24
30
36
Maximum Allowable Gap At Base of Totes (see Figure 8A above)

Zero Skew (Straight Across)
9 skew
18 skew
0
3
6
0
4.5
9
0
4.5
10.5
0
6
12*
*For items with gaps at base of totes greater than 12 long consult Automotion.
PE Release Modes:
Mode 1: Singulation Release
Releases only one zone of product at a time. It maintains gaps between product loads (or small groups of product
loads) which ultimately makes it easier to keep the product aligned and singulated.
Singulation release is the most common release mode. In singulation release mode product flow is resumed one
zone at a time when the downstream condition changes and the stopping device is disengaged. When the PLC
controlled or operator controlled stopping device is disengaged, the rollers beneath the product in the discharge zone
will begin turning and the product load will move forward. When the product load in the discharge zone clears the
photo-eye, the photo-eye will send a local signal to the solenoid controlling the pneumatic air actuators beneath the
lifter roller assemblies for the next upstream zone. The lifter rollers will press the drive belt against the carrying rollers
and the product load in that zone will move forward. This chain reaction will continue until all the zones have been reenergized or until another downstream condition initiates another accumulation condition.
This built-in product spacing property provides a steady, controlled flow of product making singulation release
perfectly suited for feeding products to such downstream equipment as curves, junctions, case packers, sealers, etc.
Section 1:

Page 8
December, 11
If an application requires that accumulated items be released at a precise rate, the photo-eye accumulation conveyor
should feed directly onto a metering belt conveyor.
Mode 2: Photo-Eye Accumulation Live Roller with Optional Slug Release
Product loads on Photo-Eye Accumulation Conveyor with the slug release option are accumulated in the same
manner as on standard Photo-Eye Accumulation Conveyor. There are times, however, when system rates dictate
that product must move through the system faster. In singulation release mode time is lost because each zone must
wait for the preceding zone to become clear before it can begin to resume forward movement. Time loss is minimized
in slug release mode because a predetermined length of conveyor can be released all at once. When the
downstream condition changes and the stopping device is disengaged in the discharge zone a photo-eye
accumulation conveyor equipped with the slug release option will release the load in predetermined slugs. The shift
from accumulation mode to release mode occurs instantly throughout the whole pre-determined slug zone.
There are two items, both of which must be ordered separately, that are required when setting up a pre-determined
slug zone - a slug module and a slug isolation link. In photo-eye accumulation the photo-eyes are daisy-chained
together. The wiring harness that connects one photo-eye to the next not only supplies each photo-eye module with
the required 24VDC, it can also be used to group slug zones.
Sub-Class 4 (SA) Singulation Air Live Roller Conveyor

In Singulation Air Accumulation Live Roller Conveyor the driving force is provided in the same fashion as TA except
the air actuators beneath the lifter roller assemblies are grouped together in pre-determined accumulation zone
lengths. The zone is activated through the use of a counterweighted Sensor Roller Assembly (SRA). The sensor
roller assemblies use a rocking motion to mechanically activate an air valve located beneath the sensor roller. This
valve pneumatically controls the air supply that inflates or deflates the air actuators located beneath the lifter roller
assemblies in the next upstream accumulation zone. In its normally open mode the actuator lifts the drive belt and the
drive belt turns the carrying rollers. If the line becomes full and a carton rests on the sensor roller assembly, air to the
preceding zone is stopped which lowers the lifter roller assemblies and removes the driving force from the zone.
When the product load passes the sensor roller assembly, air is restored to the zone and the driving force is returned.
Principles of Operation:
Conveyor systems are designed to move product from point A to point B. Unfortunately, point B is not always ready
to accept product from point A. When this occurs it is necessary to accumulate product on the conveyor until it can
proceed on to point B. For example, boxes exiting a pick module are typically sent to a fill and seal workstation. If
the boxes are not sealed at the same rate or faster rate than the rate at which they exit the pick module, they will back
up.
belt, roller brake, or case stop which is external to the accumulation process must be employed to actually stop the
in Figure 9A). This portion of conveyor is referred to as the discharge zone.
Figure 9A
Section 1:

Page 9
December, 11
An SA Accumulation Conveyor is divided into a series of independent Figure 10A:

operating zones. Each zone has a series of lifter roller assemblies.
Each lifter roller assembly consists of a lifter roller mounted in a pivoting
frame that is raised and lowered by a low-pressure pneumatic air
actuator. When inflated, the lifter roller lifts the conveyor belt in contact
with the carrying rollers providing driving force. A counter-balanced
sensor roller (Figure 10A) located in the next forward, or downstream,
zone controls the operational mode of each zone.
The Sensor Roller Assembly (SRA) incorporates a counter-balanced
pivoting roller that in its static position has its leading roller slightly above
the adjacent carrying rollers. The SRA holds open a normally closed Figure 10B:
3-way valve. This will allow air to flow through the valve, pressurize the
pneumatic bladder, raising the lifter roller assembly and the conveyor belt
to drive the carrying rollers. (See Figure 10B)
Product depressing the leading edge of the sensor roller will cause the
SRA to pivot to a position where it no longer holds the air valve open.
This allows the valve to return to a normally closed state. The air that
was previously actuating the lifter roller assembly is released through the
valve and exhausts into the atmosphere. The bladder deflates, lowering
the lifter roller assembly and removing the driving force. (See Figure
Figure 10C:
10C)
In the following example product will accumulate in the discharge zone
and the rest of the accumulation conveyor will continue running until
Product Load B (See Figure 10D) reaches and rests on the sensor roller
in the first accumulation zone. The sensor roller rocks forward and
closes the valve, which deflates the air actuator beneath the lifter roller
assemblies in the preceding zone. Since the drive belt no longer comes
in contact with the carrying rollers in that zone, product may accumulate
with zero line pressure.
Figure 10D:
Subsequent product such as Product Load C (See Figure 11A) will travel along the conveyor in the same fashion as
Product Load B. Upon reaching the non-powered zone created by B product load C will coast to a stop. Additional
product will accumulate in that zone until the sensor roller for that zone remains covered and consequently drops out
power to the preceding zone.
All succeeding items will travel along the conveyor and coast to a halt behind the preceding stopped product load in
the same fashion as product loads B and C (See Figure 11A). Typically, product will coast to a stop and come to rest
behind the preceding product load. Occasionally, due to conveyor speed and load characteristics, gaps may occur
between product loads.
Section 1:

Page 10
December, 11
Figure 11A
Regardless of the length of accumulation and the assortment of product sizes, weights, etc., any number of items can
be accumulated with zero line pressure. (See Figure 11B).
An item will continue its forward travel as long as the next forward, or downstream, zone is clear. Product will
continue to accumulate rearward until the mechanical device stopping the product in the discharge zone is
disengaged.
Figure 11B:
Tandem Sensors: Tandem sensor rollers are two sensor roller units that
are pneumatically linked together and function as a single sensing
element to control one accumulation zone. The second sensor unit
being located 12 forward of the standard first unit for items with gaps
ranging up to 12.
Figure 12A
They are to be used on any Singulation Air Conveyor that will have to
convey items with handles or sloped ends. This type of product load will
create gaps between the bottom of the items and potentially cause them
to miss a sensor when accumulating.
Tandem sensors should be used only when the product is predominantly totes. This would represent a minimum of
80% totes and the remaining product consisting of various sized cartons.
Special consideration must be given to speeds on conveyors utilizing tandem sensors. On totes with an overall length
of 23 or less you will need to add an additional 12 of length to the product when calculating conveyor speed.
Example: 22 + 12 = 34 total length.
On totes with an overall length in excess of 23 add the additional 12 of length and round up to the nearest 24 zone.
Example: 28 + 12 = 40 + 8 (rounding up to nearest zone) = 48 total. This is done because the longer tote will
occupy the sensors of two zones no matter what position it is in. This condition has a tendency to reduce the
momentum of the totes to almost zero FPM and create cycling effect that can appear at any position along the
conveyor line. To the casual observer this can appear as a dead spot or a malfunctioning sensor on the conveyor.
The use of high-speed bearings will aggravate this condition.
Section 1:

Page 11
December, 11
With the additional 12 or more to the product length, it is easy for conveyor speeds to escalate. A judgment call must
be made to add the slug release option. For items with gaps more than 12 long consult Automotion.
SA Release Modes:
Mode 1: Singulation Release
The standard release mode furnished on Automotions SA class conveyor is singulation release. Singulation release
is so named because it releases only one zone of product at a time. It maintains gaps between product loads (or
small groups of product loads), which ultimately makes it easier to keep the product aligned and singulated.
Singulation release is the most common release mode. In singulation release mode product flow is resumed one
zone at a time when the downstream condition changes and the stopping device is disengaged. Continuing our
example, when the PLC controlled or operator controlled stopping device is disengaged, the rollers beneath the
product in the discharge zone will begin turning and the product load will move forward. When the product load in the
discharge zone clears the sensor roller, the sensor roller will return to its static position and once again hold open the
normally closed 3-way valve allowing air to flow through the valve. The pneumatic bladder will pressurize, raising the
lifter roller assembly and the conveyor belt to drive the carrying rollers in the next upstream zone. This chain reaction
will continue until all the zones have been re-energized or until another downstream condition initiates another
accumulation condition.
This built-in product spacing property provides a steady, controlled flow of product making singulation release
perfectly suited for feeding products to such downstream equipment as curves, junctions, case packers, sealers, etc.
Figure 12B
If an application requires accumulated items be released at a precise rate, the accumulation conveyor should feed
directly onto a metering belt conveyor.
Carton Feet Per Minute (CFPM) of a Singulation Air Live Roller Conveyor equipped with singulation release is
approximately 50% of the conveyors actual surface speed.
The flow rate is based upon conveyor speed, product length and the singulation gap produced. The singulation gap is
the distance between product loads as zones are energized. The size of the gaps between items will vary.
Singulation gap is dependent upon the length, weight, and condition of the bottom surface and ability to coast in a
zone once the driving force is removed. Short length items may advance in groups of two (or more) while longer
items will commonly generate trailing gaps that approximate the length of the item. This rate is used to determine the
proper speed for matching the requirements of adjoining conveyors and equipment
Mode 2: Singulation Air Live Roller with Optional Slug Release (SA/SR)
The optional slug release mode allows for a pre-determined length of accumulated product load to release in a solid
train. Slug release should be used in an application when the maximum output of product loads is of prime concern.
At any given speed, a Singulation Air Conveyor equipped with the slug release option will discharge its product load at
the conveyors actual rated surface speed.
Product loads on SA/SR conveyor are accumulated in the same manner as on standard SA conveyor, however, a
second set of air actuators is required to accomplish slug release with SA type mechanical accumulation conveyor.
Section 1:

Page 12
December, 11
The additional air actuators are located right next to the original set used during the accumulation process. Through
an electrical signal the solenoid valve overrides the sensor roller depressed during normal accumulation conditions
and shifts the air supply from the standard discharge zone to the second set of air actuators. When activated, this
manifold causes the lifter roller assemblies to raise and drive the carrying rollers regardless of the position of the
sensor rollers. When demand for product is present, air is shifted to the secondary set of air actuators to release the
load in predetermined slugs up to 50-0 long. The shift from accumulation mode to release mode occurs instantly
throughout the whole predetermined slug zone.
Figure 13A
When the release of products is complete and the secondary air signal is removed, the valve closes, the air exhausts
from the secondary manifold and the conveyor undertakes the normal mode of operation. Accumulation begins as the
discharge zone shifts to a normally powered condition.
Figure 13B
Carton Feet Per Minute (CFPM) of slug release is 100% of the conveyor speed (approximately.) when operating in a
slug release mode versus only 50% as when operating in the standard accumulation / singulation mode.
A common Slug release application is where an accumulation line must be emptied rapidly to feed such equipment as
sorter conveyors, high-speed palletizers, etc.
Slug Release is also used to eliminate the release lag experienced with Singulation, allowing upstream conveyors to
release product from the SA with a minimum of delay.
Section 1:

Page 13
December, 11
Discharge Zone Product Release Options: (PE./.SA Accumulation Conveyor)

belt, roller brake, or case stop which is external to the accumulation process must be employed to actually stop the
in Figure 14A). This portion of conveyor is referred to as the discharge zone.
A remotely controlled discharge zone allows a conveyor to be functionally interlocked with downstream equipment
such as full line sensors, metering belts, case sealers, strappers, etc. The remotely controlled discharge zone is for
use in applications where the stopping or braking action is provided by the downstream conveyor or equipment.
Figure 14A
As long as the downstream operation calls for product, the remotely controlled discharge zone remains powered. If
the adjoining conveyor stops or becomes full, or if a machine is not cycled to receive product, the discharge zone will
shift to a non-powered state and the first items reaching the zone will coast to a stop. All trailing items will accumulate
rearward with no build-up of line pressure in the trailing non-powered zone.
When the operation again requires product from the accumulation line, the remotely controlled discharge zone shifts
to the powered state and the accumulated products resume travel.
The remotely controlled discharge zone is controlled by a 4-way, spring return solenoid valve. In its normally closed
state, the valve exhausts air from the actuators and the lifter roller assemblies are disengaged. A maintained
electrical signal opens the valve and raises the lifter roller assemblies, thus returning power to the zone.
Equipment Utilized at
Discharge Zone
Control
Singulation Release Mode
Slug Release Mode
Air Operated Roller Brake

(AORB)
PLC or Operator Controlled
Available
Available
Air Operated Roller Stop

(AORS)
PLC or Operator Controlled
Available
Available
Brake Belt
PLC Controlled
Available
Available
Adjustable Pressure (AP)
Manual cam adjustment in

each pressure roller located
in discharge zone.
Available (SA only)
Not Available
Section 1:

Page 14
December, 11
Option 1: Air Operated Roller Brake at Discharge

An Air Operated Roller Brake (AORB) Figure 15A
is an optional discharge zone that
provides a smooth, positive brake
force in the first 5-0 long operating
zone. Selectively controlled, the Air
Operated Roller Brake controls the
forward movement and release of
products from the conveyor.
The AORB discharge zone is an effective and economical alternative to a brake belt. An AORB discharge zone can
be used when the factors of flow rate, product weight and conveyor speed do not require the more positive spacing
action of a brake belt conveyor. Optional coated rollers may be used for additional braking power. The coated
surface of the carrying rollers increases the coefficient of friction.
AORB equipped conveyor feed a continuously running powered curve. When the downstream accumulation
conveyor becomes full the AORB halts the leading item and all trailing items will accumulate behind it.
Brake units are constructed with a series of pneumatic bladders, the same as those used to actuate a lifter roller
assembly. When inflated, the pneumatic bladders will raise a traction plate against the bottom of the carrying rollers.
Section 1:

Page 15
December, 11
In its normal position, the 4-way solenoid valve engages the brake units and lowers the lifter roller assemblies in the
5-0 long discharge zone. A maintained electrical signal will shift the valve and cause the zone to become powered.
Figure 16A
Option 2: Air Operated Roller Stop at Discharge

The AORS discharge zone is another economical alternative to a brake belt. An AORS discharge zone can be used
when the factors of flow rate, product weight and conveyor speed do not require the more positive spacing action of a
brake belt conveyor.
Air Operate Roller Stop units utilize a pneumatic cylinder and a pivoting frame attached to a roller. When activated,
the pneumatic cylinder pivots the frame, which raises a roller in the path of the product and the lifter rollers in the
discharge zone are lowered. The roller stop in the lowered position acts as a carrying roller.
Figure 16B
Section 1:

Page 16
December, 11
Option 3: Brake Belt at Discharge

Brake belts are used immediately downstream of the discharge zone to ensure positive spacing. Factors such as flow
rate, product weight and conveyor speed must be reviewed when determining if the more positive spacing action that
a brake belt conveyor provides is required. The higher friction surface of the belt versus the surface of the carrying
rollers in live roller provide greater stopping and starting of product. In addition, speed changes can be utilized to
optimize gapping.
In this example, two SA conveyors feed brake-belt conveyors to control the flow of product through a merge conveyor
bed. (See Figure 17A)
Figure 17A
Option 4: Adjustable Pressure Conveyor at Discharge

An optional discharge zone employing a small section of cam adjusted AP Adjustable Pressure Conveyor. Pressure
rollers are adjusted downward to lessen the driving force of the drive belt against the carrying rollers. The first product
reaching the end of the conveyor slows until it comes to rest against a fixed stop and awaits manual removal. All
trailing items accumulate behind the first. When the first product is removed the second advances forward until it
rests against the fixed stop or is manually removed. Subsequent product advances forward in the same fashion,
accumulating rearward until they are manually removed. Even though this zone is adjustable, slight line pressure will
result if too much product is allowed to accumulate. This zone is commonly used in applications where products are
manually transferred from the conveyor to a workstation, pallet, truck, etc. This option is available only with
singulation release SA conveyor.
Figure 17B
Section 1:

Page 17
December, 11
Minimum Product Length

Conveyable Items: Any item with a bottom surface that is flat, continuous and rigid can be conveyed on Live
Roller Conveyor. This includes such items as cartons, cases, totes, drums, etc.
Item Weight: Transportation Air and Photo-Eye Accumulation have no minimum weight restriction and will
convey items weighing as much as 100 lbs./ft. The entire range of weights may be conveyed simultaneously
without any need for adjustments, etc. The minimum conveyable weight for Singulation Air Conveyor is
dependant upon the length of the product being handled. The mechanical sensor roller requires a minimum
of 8 oz. to activate.
Conveyor Width: Typically the conveyor is 2 to 3 wider than the widest product handled. Product may
require a greater width for clearance around curves. See "Determining System Width" on page 5 of VBSection 1 or page X of GV-Section 1 for details.
Drive and Take-Up Selection: Refer to Technical Data pages 20-21.
Product Flow: Adjustable Pressure (AP) conveyors are designed for omni-directional transportation of
product loads, reversible travel possible. Transportation Air, Photo-Eye Accumulation, and Singulation Air
conveyors are designed for one-way, non-reversing travel only.
Horizontal Operation: Live roller conveyor will operate at its greatest efficiency when applied as a horizontal
conveyor. AP or TA may be used as a decline conveyor (2-3 degrees max.), however its low-pressure
accumulation feature will be lost. As items accumulate on a declining conveyor, the powered rollers will
assume the same characteristics as a pitched gravity line, adopting its line pressure build-up and uncontrolled
speed characteristics. Photo-Eye Accumulation, and Singulation Air conveyors should not be used in an
inclined or declined accumulating application. Product roll-back or run-away will result in an extremely erratic
operation.
Minimum Top of Roller: Minimum distance from the floor to the top of roller is 14 - 24 depending upon the
drive requirements of the conveyor.
Roller Spacing: Three rollers should support product loads carried on a Live Roller Conveyor at all times. In
situations where the bottom of the product load is not firm, the contents within the package may cause the
load to sag between the supporting rollers. To minimize or eliminate sagging, the contents of the package
should be taken into consideration. Roller centers should be less than the smallest possible article within the
package whenever the possibility of sagging exists. Live load will also determine the maximum roller centers.
Lc = Roller Centers Required to Minimize or
Reduce sagging
Section 1:

Page 18
December, 11
Along with the roller spacing of the carrying rollers, packages ideally should also be supported by a minimum of two
powered carrying rollers at all times. To meet the powered carrying roller criteria, pressure rollers should be equally
spaced at centers no greater than the product load length.
Carrying
Roller Centers
Pressure
Roller Centers
Lifter
Roller Centers
2
3
4
6
12
12
6
12
12
Frame Type (Pop-Out/Non-Pop-Out): The side channel of a Live Roller Conveyor is available with either a
Pop-Out or Non-Pop-Out roller feature. These features are for the safety of people working nearby the
conveyor. The Pop-Out slot extends through the top flange of the conveyor frame. The roller axle under
normal conditions rests at the bottom of the slot. However, should a foreign object be situated between the
carrying rollers and the belt or pressure rollers, the carrying rollers will ride up out of the slot.
The Pop-Out feature must be maintained in all Live Roller Conveyors with roller spacing greater than 2 and
installed where accessible to personnel. Belt driven live roller conveyors installed over-head require that the
rollers be captured within the frame for safety reasons. Should a roller pop out, they could strike personnel or
equipment below and cause injury or damage.
Axle Isolator Noise Reduction System: All carrying rollers are held in place by axle isolators. The axle
isolator insulates the roller axle from the conveyor frame, thereby reducing vibrations and noise levels while
eliminating wear and tear on the conveyor side frames. The carrying and lifter rollers are equipped with highspeed bearings for added noise reduction.
Rollers (Standard or High-Speed): All rollers are equipped with ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
Conveyor Speed: Live Roller conveyors are available with standard fixed speeds of 60 through 200 feet per
minute in increments of 10 feet per minute and 220 through 320 feet per minute in increments of 20 feet per
minute. The required conveyor speed will depend upon the systems flow-rate requirements and the
conveyors release mode. Please refer to page 21 in this section for further details.
Line Pressure: The line pressure developed by loads blocked on a belt driven live roller conveyor will vary.
Depending factors are load weight, product foot print, type of belting being used, etc. As a rule the line
pressure placed on the leading carton should be no more than 6 to 8% of the total accumulated weight of the
load, yet not be in a range that may damage or crush the leading carton or product.
Live Roller Accumulating Skew Beds: Live roller accumulating skew beds can be used to laterally move
product to align product to one side of the conveyor. Live guard rail should also be considered for best
results.
Product Movement per 12 Foot Bed
Nominal Width
(Sub Class) roller centers / zones
18
24
30
36
(SA) 2 roller centers / 36 zones

(SA) 3 roller centers / 36 zones
(PE) 2 roller centers / 36 zones
(PE) 3 roller centers / 36 zones
9
8 1/2
12
11
6
8
9
9
5
6
7
7
6
5 1/2
8
8
Section 1:

Page 19
December, 11
Environmental Conditions: Live Roller Conveyor is designed to operate within the normal temperature and
atmospheric conditions found in plants and warehouses. Several conditions that should be watched for
include:
High Temperatures
Do not use a Live Roller Conveyor in an application where the ambient temperature exceeds 130F. All of
the components are within safe operating limits up to this temperature.
Cold Room Temperatures
Live Roller Conveyor may be used in applications where the ambient temperature is as low as 39F without
requiring special consideration. Room temperatures at 38F or below should be treated as freezer
temperatures.
Freezer Temperatures
AP may be used in applications where the ambient temperature is between 38 and 0F. However,
horsepower calculations must be increased by 25%. For freezer temperatures between 0 and -20F,
increase horsepower calculations by 50%.
All freezer applications must include an air-dryer to remove moisture from the air lines. Transportation Air,
Photo-Eye Accumulation, and Singulation Air conveyors will not work in freezer room environments.
All conveyors in cold room and freezer applications require special oil, grease and belting to keep them from
requiring excessive amounts of horsepower to start and maintain design parameters. Please consult
Automotions Engineering Department for further details.
Oily Conditions
An application having an oil mist in the atmosphere or where the parts being conveyed may drip oil onto the
carrying rollers is not recommended. Applications in oily environments must be referred to Automotions
Engineering Department for further details.
Wash Down Conditions
AP may be used in wash down applications after extensive alterations. Refer to the Automotions
Engineering Department for further details on wash down applications. Do not use Transportation Air, PhotoEye Accumulation or Singulation Air conveyors in wash down conditions.
Section 1:

Page 20
December, 11
Technical Data:
Conveyor Widths: Live Roller Conveyors are available in standard widths (nominal overall widths) of 18,
24, 30 and 36. It is recommended that the conveyor width be greater than the widest item to be conveyed.
Conveyor Lengths: The overall conveyor length for Adjustable Pressure, Transportation Air, Singulation Air
and Photo-Eye Accumulation conveyor can be furnished in 12 increments. Intermediate beds are available
in zone length increments only. All exit beds and brake beds are available in 144 lengths only. Any field
cuts required to meet layout requirements must be made to the entry bed of the conveyor. The maximum
length is subject to a maximum allowable belt pull of 680 pounds.
When an application has a requirement that exceeds belt pull limitations, two or more Adjustable Pressure or
Transportation Air, Photo-Eye Accumulation, and Singulation Air conveyors may be used consecutively.
Roller Centers: Live Roller conveyors are available with the carrying rollers located on 2, 3 and 4 centers.
Carrying Rollers: 1-7/8 Dia., 7/16 hex spring-loaded axles with ABEC-1 precision grease packed bearings.
Pressure Rollers (AP Only): 1-7/8 Dia., 5/16 hex spring-loaded axles with ABEC-1 precision grease packed
bearings.
Lifter Rollers (TA, PE, & SA Only): 1-7/8 Dia., 7/16 hex spring-loaded axles with ABEC-1 precision grease
packed bearings.
Air Requirements: Each actuation of the air actuator assembly requires approximately .00063 cu. ft. of air.
Frame: Formed 6 x 1-3/8 x 10 Ga. steel side channel and 4-1/2 x 1-3/8 x 12 Ga. tie channel, the side
channel is punched to accept an axle isolator for a 7/16 hex roller axle on 2, 3 or 4 centers. The frames
standard finish is Automotion gray. A galvanized finish and other powder coat colors are available.
Frame Type (Pop-Out/Non-Pop-Out): The side

channel of a Live Roller Conveyor is available
with either a Pop-Out or a Non-Pop-Out roller
feature. The Pop-Out slot extends through the
top flange of the conveyor frame. The roller axle
under normal conditions rests at the bottom of
the slot. The side channel of the Non-Pop-Out
frame style is punched to accept an axle isolator
for a 7/16 hex roller.
Axle Isolator Noise Reduction System: All carrying rollers are held in place by axle isolators. The axle
isolator insulates the roller axle from the conveyor frame, thereby reducing vibrations and noise levels while
eliminating wear and tear on the conveyor side frames. The carrying and lifter rollers are equipped with
ABEC-1 precision bearings for added noise reduction.
Belting: Type 6: PVC belt with polyester cord, friction surface both sides - 8 wide. No. 2-SP Clipper lacing
and No. 13 (.093 diameter) Clipper lacing pin.
Section 1:

Page 21
December, 11
HTU Horizontal Take-Up: There are two types of horizontal take-ups used on Automotion Live Roller
conveyor; automatic take-up and manual take-up. The automatic take-up employs spring tension to keep
pressure on the take-up pulley. The overall belt length and belt pull are used to determine the number of
springs required to effectively take up the slack in a belt.
The general rule is to use 1 long spring per 200 lbs. of effective belt pull (maximum 3 long springs) and 1
short spring per 160 lbs. of effective belt pull (maximum 4 short springs). Two springs minimum are always
required on all conveyors to maintain even tension.
Use Automatic Take-Up with long springs whenever possible. When space restrictions prohibit the use of the
Automatic Take-Up with long springs, the next best is the Automatic Take-Up with short springs. Only use a
manual take-up when physical space limitations prohibit the use of the Automatic Take-Up.
Manual take-ups are typically used on short runs when there is not enough room to mount an automatic takeup. Manual take-ups employ two long threaded rods similar to jack screws. The screws are tightened in
order to move the take-up pulley and, consequently, apply pressure on the belt to take-up any slack.
STU Swing Take-Up: Swing take-ups also employ a threaded rod to take-up belt slack and should only be
used on a very short conveyor where a Horizontal Take-Up (HTU) does not fit.
Drive: All Live Roller conveyors are available with either a center drive or an end drive assembly. Center
drive assemblies are equipped with a motor mount that allows a drive motor and reducer to be foot mounted
beneath the conveyor bed. End drive assemblies are equipped with a motor mount for foot mounting a motor
and reducer assembly to the side of the drive unit. Center Drive includes an integral take-up. Take-ups on
end drives must be ordered separately. If hard start belt pull exceeds 1100 lbs., an electronic soft start must
be used. Refer to step 5 on page 24 of this section. A soft start assembly including a disconnect can be
ordered and shipped mounted to the drive. A panel mounted soft start may be used in lieu of the soft start
assembly, however, a four pole disconnect must be supplied at the motor to ensure the start of the motor is
controlled through the soft start.
Standard Drive Configuration: The standard power unit mounting consists of a foot mounted right angle
C-flange reducer, 230/460/3/60 TEFC C-face motor, roller chain and sprocket drive set to provide drive
power to the drive pulley. Automotion Live Roller conveyors are also available with a synchronous belt drive
train package.
Use the drive type selection chart below and Effective Belt Pull to select the appropriate drive pulley size.
Drive Type Selection Chart
Drive Type
Max. EBP
Max. HP
Drive Dia.
Shaft Dia.
Entry
Exit
Belt
REF: 4SLV
6CD, 6DE
8CD, 8DE
10CD
140 lbs.
375 lbs.
600 lbs.
680 lbs.
SLAVE
1.5 HP
3.0 HP
5.0 HP
4.0
6.5
8.5
10.5
1 3/16
1 3/16
1 7/16
1 11/16
T1 TE
4.0
4.0
4.0
T2 TE
4.0
4.0
4.0
8
8
8
8
Conveyor Speed: Live Roller conveyors are available with standard fixed speeds of 60 through 200 feet per
minute in increments of 10 feet per minute and 220 through 320 feet per minute in increments of 20 feet per
minute. The required conveyor speed will depend upon the systems flow-rate requirements and the
conveyors release mode.
Section 1:

Page 22
December, 11
To calculate required conveyor speed for case feet, use the following formula and the appropriate factor:
Conveyor Speed = Case Feet / Factor
AP-Adjustable Pressure Live Roller
TA-Transportation Air Live Roller
PE-Photo-Eye Accumulation Live Roller
PE/SR Photo-Eye Accum. with Slug Release
SA-Live Roller Accumulation
SA-Live Roller Accum. with Slug Release
Factor = 1.0
Factor = 1.0
Factor = 0.5
Factor = 1.0
Factor = 0.5
Factor = 1.0
Sensors: On the photo-eye accumulation conveyor, the standard photo-eye sensor is a 24V DC photo-eye
and reflector. This photo eye can be skewed 9 or 18 to accommodated gaps between totes. An under
roller mount option, featuring a 24V DC proximity sensor is also available (Specify U under the Photo-Eye
Skew Angle)
Air Supply Requirements: Transportation Air, Photo-Eye Accumulation, and Singulation Air conveyors low
pressure manifold system requires an ample, constant supply of clean plant air that has been passed through
a refrigerant dryer.
Each Transportation Air, Photo-Eye Accumulation, and Singulation Air conveyor requires a filter/regulator unit
to filter the air (50 micron) and regulate air at operating pressure (14-18 psi).
The air supplied to Transportation Air, Photo-Eye Accumulation, and Singulation Air conveyors operating in
cold room as described under Environmental Conditions or in high humidity areas should be processed
through a standard refrigerant dryer and a desiccant dryer to eliminate moisture.
The air volume requirements of Transportation Air, Photo-Eye Accumulation, and Singulation Air conveyors
may be determined using the formula on page 26 of this section
Section 1:

Page 23
December, 11
Horsepower Calculations: Worksheet

Conveyor Number
Conveyor Sub-Class
Conveyor Length
ft.
Conveyor Speed
fpm
EBP = { [ (
Live Load
Lbs/Ft.
Roller Centers
Conveyor Width
in.
Live/Load/Foot
Lbs/ft.
in.
Carton Rate
cpm
Carton Length
in.
O.A.L.
Slug Load
Slug Length
O.A.L. Comp. Roller
x 021) + (
x
x 035) ] + [
x
x
] x 1.33} +
Ft.
Lbs/Ft.
Ft.
Ft.
Factor Factor
Slave
EBP
Notes:
For Adjustable Pressure conveyor only multiply EBP x 1.10 before adding EBP from any slaved conveyors.
Make sure Effective Belt Pull does not exceed 680 lbs.
Make sure Hard Start Belt Pull does not exceed 1100 lbs. If so, an electrical soft start must be used.
Select Drive Pulley Size:

Calculate Effective Horsepower:
EBP
Conveyor Speed
EHP
31,350
Conveyor Sub-Class
Conveyor Number
Conveyor Length
ft.
Conveyor Speed
fpm
EBP = { [ (
Live Load
Lbs/Ft.
Roller Centers
Conveyor Width
in.
Live/Load/Foot
Lbs/ft.
in.
Carton Rate
cpm
Carton Length
in.
O.A.L.
Slug Load
Slug Length
O.A.L. Comp. Roller
x 021) + (
x
x 035) ] + [
x
x
] x 1.33} +
Ft.
Lbs/Ft.
Ft.
Ft.
Factor Factor
Slave
EBP
Notes:
For Adjustable Pressure conveyor only multiply EBP x 1.10 before adding EBP from any slaved conveyors.
Make sure Effective Belt Pull does not exceed 680 lbs.
Make sure Hard Start Belt Pull does not exceed 1100 lbs. If so, an electrical soft start must be used.
Select Drive Pulley Size:

Calculate Effective Horsepower:
EBP
Conveyor Speed
EHP
31,350
Section 1:

Page 24
December, 11
Horsepower Calculations: Formula

Step 1a: Calculate Live Load (pounds of product per linear foot of conveyor)
Live Load refers to the amount of product weight on a linear foot of conveyor (lbs./ft). The gapping of LR singulation
release has been accounted for in the live load factor. If the conveyor utilizes an optional slug release at the
discharge end you must calculate the additional live slug load. (See step 1b to calculate Live Slug Load).
Total Possible Product Load on Conveyor (lbs.) = Live Load (lbs./ft)
Step 1b: Calculate Live Slug Mode (lbs./ft. adder for slug release at discharge end)
Slug release is a discharge option for live roller conveyor. Refer to the Options for Controlling the Release of Product
in the Discharge Zone of PE or SA Accumulation Conveyors on page 14 of this section. Slug Load refers to the
product load that rests on top of the slug zone at the discharge end of the conveyor.
Total Possible Product Load on Discharge Zone (lbs.)
Slug Discharge Zone Length (ft)
= Live Slug Load (lbs./ft)
Step1c: Calculate Live Load Belt Pull

If slug release option is not utilized:
Live Load Belt Pull = (Live Load x Conveyor O.A.L. x 0.021)
If slug release option is utilized:
Live Load Belt Pull = (Live Load x Conveyor O.A.L. x 0.021) +
(Live Slug Load x Overall Slug Discharge Zone Length x 0.035)
Step 2: Calculate Dead Load Belt Pull
Dead Load refers to the friction generated by conveyor components such as terminal ends, drive and take-up pulleys, carrying
rollers and pressure or lifter rollers.
Dead Load = Overall Conveyor Length x Table 1 Component Factor x Table 2 Roller Factor
Table No. 1: Component Factor
< 100 FPM
Precision Bearings
0.40
Table No. 2: Roller Factor

Roller Centers
< 100 FPM
2
3
4
4.50
2.25
2.00
101-200 FPM
201-300 FPM
>301 FPM
0.45
0.50
0.55
101-200 FPM
201-300 FPM
>301 FPM
4.75
2.50
2.25
5.0
2.75
2.5
5.25
3.00
2.75
Step 3: Calculate Effective Belt Pull (EBP)

Use the Live Load Belt Pull and Dead Load Belt Pull values calculated in Steps 1c and 2 above. Remember to add
any belt pull from slaved conveyors previously calculated such as power curves or skew sections.
EBP = [(Live Load Belt Pull+ Dead Load Belt Pull) x 1.25 Safety Factor] + Any applicable slave pull
Note: For Adjustable Pressure (AP) conveyor only - multiply EBP x 0.10 to account for friction from stopped load weight.
Section 1:

Page 25
December, 11
Step 4: Effective Belt Pull Versus Strength of Provided Belt

Verify that the Effective Belt Pull (lbs.) you just calculated does not exceed 680 lbs., which is the maximum rated belt
strength of the standard Automotion belt. If effective belt pull exceeds 680, you will need to shorten the overall
conveyor length.
Step 5: Hard Start Belt Pull Versus Strength of Provided Belt
Hard Start Belt Pull refers to the belt pull during motor start-up. If Hard Start Belt Pull exceeds 1100 lbs. an electrical
soft start must be used.
Hard Start Belt Pull = Overall Conveyor Length x Table 3 Hard Start Factor
Table #3: Hard Start Factor
Precision Bearings
< 100 FPM

6
101-200 FPM
8
201-300 FPM
10
>301 FPM
12
Step 6: Compute Required Effective Horsepower

EBP x Conveyor Speed (fpm)
31,350
Section 1:

= EHP
Page 26
December, 11
Determining the Hand:

6CD, 8CD, and 10CD Drive Trains
conveyor utilizes a left hand drive. When
requesting replacements or spares, please
provide the following information to the
Automotion Customer Service Department:
Type of Conveyor
Belt or Live Roller
Drive Hand as described above.
Conveyor ID number Obtain from
label on drive enclosure
6DE and 8DE Drive Trains with Side Mount Drive

conveyor utilizes a left hand drive. When
requesting replacements or spares, please
provide the following information to the
Automotion Customer Service Department:
Type of Conveyor
Belt or Live Roller
Drive Hand as described above.
Conveyor ID number Obtain from
label on drive enclosure.
Section 1:

Page 27
December, 11
Air Supply Calculations:

Device
PSI
SCFM per Cycle
Case Stop (SA, PE Conveyor)

Bow Arm and Trap Arm Diverter
Air Operated Divert Arm
18 wide
24 wide
30 wide
36 wide
Right Angle Pusher.
18 wide
24 wide
30 wide
36 wide
Air Brake
PE and SA Accumulation
3 and 4 o.c.
2 o.c.
SA / SR Slug Release
3 and 4 o.c.
2 o.c.
18
80
.033
.292
80
80
80
80
.019
.031
.032
.052
80
80
80
80
18
.420
.561
.702
.843
.025
18
18
.00063 / ft.
.00126 / ft.
18
18
.00126 / ft.
.00252 / ft.
Example:
Assume you have a 90-0 lg. PE Accumulation conveyor with a bow arm diverter, 2 air brakes, and a case stop:
Accumulation Conveyor (PE or SA)
90 x 25 CPM x .00063 = 1.42 SCFM
Bow Arm Diverter
1 x 25 CPM x.292 = 7.30 SCFM
Air Brake
2 Brakes @ 7 cycles / min. each is 14 x .025 = .35 SCFM
Case Stop
2 x 5 cycles/min. is 10 x .033 = .33 SCFM
Sub Total: 9.4 SCFM
x 1.25 Flow Loss
Total Air Requirements for Sample Conveyor 11.75 SCFM
Section 1:

Page 28
December, 11

Figures
Section 2:
(LR) Belt Driven Live Roller:

Figures
Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
Figure Listing:............................................................................................................................. 3
Fig 301: AP Entry Bed (Internal Terminal End) ........................................................................ 4
Fig 302: AP Entry Bed (External Terminal End) ....................................................................... 5
Fig 303: AP Entry Bed (Side Mount End Drive)........................................................................ 6
Fig 307: AP Intermediate Bed .................................................................................................... 7
Fig 312: AP Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End)........................................................................... 8
Fig 313: AP Exit Bed (External Terminal End).......................................................................... 9
Fig 318: AP Entry or Exit Bed (External Terminal End) ......................................................... 10
Fig 301: PE Entry Bed (Internal Terminal End) ...................................................................... 11
Fig 302: PE Entry Bed (External Terminal End) ..................................................................... 12
Fig 307: PE Intermediate Bed .................................................................................................. 13
Fig 308: PE Intermediate Bed (with Roller Brake).................................................................. 14
Fig 312: PE Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End) ......................................................................... 15
Fig 314: PE Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End with Roller Brake)........................................... 16
Fig 315: PE Exit Bed (External Terminal End with Roller Brake).......................................... 17
Fig 301: SA Entry Bed (Internal Terminal End) ...................................................................... 18
Fig 302: SA Exit Bed (External Terminal End)........................................................................ 19
Fig 307: SA Intermediate Bed .................................................................................................. 20
Fig 308: SA Intermediate Bed (with Roller Brake) ................................................................. 21
Fig 312: SA Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End)......................................................................... 22
Fig 314: SA Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End with Roller Brake)........................................... 23
Fig 315: SA Exit Bed (External Terminal End with Roller Brake) ......................................... 24
Fig 301: TA Entry Bed (Internal Terminal End) ...................................................................... 25
Fig 302: TA Entry Bed (External Terminal End) ..................................................................... 26
Fig 303: TA Entry Bed (Side Mount End Drive) ...................................................................... 27
Fig 304: TA Entry Bed Alignment Section (Internal Terminal End) ...................................... 28
Fig 305: TA Entry Bed Merge Section (Internal Terminal End) ............................................. 29
Fig 306: TA Entry Bed Divert Section (Internal Terminal End) ............................................. 30
Fig 307: TA Intermediate Bed .................................................................................................. 31
Fig 309: TA Intermediate Bed Divert Section ......................................................................... 32
Fig 310: TA Intermediate Bed Merge Section......................................................................... 33
Fig 311: TA Intermediate Bed Sawtooth Merge...................................................................... 34
Fig 312: TA Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End) ......................................................................... 35
Fig 313: TA Exit Bed (External Terminal End)........................................................................ 36
Fig 316: TA Exit Bed Merge Section (Internal Terminal End)................................................ 37
Fig 317: TA Exit Bed Divert Section (Internal Terminal End) ................................................ 38
Fig 318: TA Exit / Entry Bed (External Terminal End)............................................................ 39
Section 2:

Figures
Page 2
December, 11
Figure Listing:
Section 2:

Figures
Page 3
December, 11
Fig 301: AP Entry Bed (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
6 deep x 1 3/8 flange x
10 ga. steel channel frame
with axle isolators included.
Drive Belt:
8 wide flat drive belt
Pulley:
4 dia. crowned face,
1 3/16 dia. shaft, C hubs.
Rollers (Pressure):
1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga. roller,
5/16 hex axle mounted in a
mechanically
adjustable
cam.
Rollers (Carrying / Slave):
7/16 hex axles.
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
Side view.

18, 24, 30 and 36
Front view.
Notes:
1. Slave rollers included at terminal end.
2. Bed is available in increments of 12 from 72 to 144. (Specify in inches)
3. All carrying and pressure rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
Sub Class
301
AP

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
See
Note 2
Frame Type
Pulley Face
N
P
Std.
MC
Page 4
December, 11
Fig 302: AP Entry Bed (External Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Rollers (Pressure):
5/16 hex axle mounted in
a mechanically adjustable
cam.
7/16 hex axles.
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
Front view.
Notes:
1. Terminal end assembly is not included with this entry bed.
2. Bed is available in increments of 12 from 72 to 144. (Specify in inches)
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
Sub Class
302
AP

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
See
Note 2
Frame Type
N
P
Page 5
December, 11
Fig 303: AP Entry Bed (Side Mount End Drive)

Components:
Bed Section:
(6DE) 10 deep x 1 3/8
flange x 10 ga. steel
channel frame with axle
isolators included.
(8DE) 12 deep x 1 3/8
isolators included.
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
(6DE) 6 dia. crowned face,
1 7/16 dia. shaft, C hubs
Rollers (Pressure):
cam.
Right hand drive shown.

72"
PRODUCT FLOW
SLAVE ROLLERS
6"
Side view.
NOMINAL
WIDTH +1/4"
15"
MAX.

7/16 hex axles.
10"
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
2"
Front view.
Notes:
1. Slave rollers included over drive pulley.
2. Bed is available in a length of 72 only.
4. When no entry end drop kit is specified, a terminal end cover will be provided.
5. Entry end drop kit not required for V-Belt conveyors.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
303
Sub
Class
AP
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
Bed
2
Length
72
See
Note 2
Frame
Type
Drive
Hand
Drive
Pulley
Dia.
N
P
L
R
6DE
8DE
Pulley
Face
Std.
MC
FPM
HP
Soft
Start
Drive
Train
Sprocket
Hub Type
Y
N
Belt
Chain
Std.
QD
See Horsepower
Calculations*
Entry
End
Drop
Kit
LR
1
BC
2
BC
GV
None
*Horsepower calculations are located in Section 1: (LR) Belt Driven Live Roller: Application and Technical Data.
1
Belt conveyor 4TE or 5TE drop kit.
2
Belt conveyor 6TE drop kit.
Section 2:

Figures
Page 6
December, 11
Fig 307: AP Intermediate Bed
PRODUCT FLOW
Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Rollers (Pressure):
cam.
7/16 hex axles.
3/8"
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH +1/4"
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
1. Bed is available in increments of 24 from 24 to 72 and 12 increments from 72 to 144. Specify in inches.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
Sub Class
307
AP

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
See
Note 2
Frame Type
N
P
Page 7
December, 11
Fig 312: AP Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Rollers (Pressure):
cam.
7/16 hex axles.
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
Front view.
Notes:
2. Bed is available in increments of 12 from 72 to 144. Specify in inches.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
312
Sub Class
AP

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
See
Note 2
Frame Type
Pulley Face
N
P
Std.
MC
Page 8
December, 11
Fig 313: AP Exit Bed (External Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Rollers (Pressure):
cam.
7/16 hex axles.
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
Front view.
Notes:
1. Terminal End Assembly is not included with this exit bed.
2. Bed Lengths available in 144 length only.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
313
Sub Class
AP

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
Bed Length
144
See
Note 2
Frame Type
N
P
Page 9
December, 11
Fig 318: AP Entry or Exit Bed (External Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Rollers (Pressure):
5/16 hex axle mounted in a
mechanically
adjustable
cam.
7/16 hex axles.
3/8"
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
EXTERNAL TERMINAL END
Side view.
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
318
Sub Class
AP

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
Bed Length
144
See
Note 1
Frame Type
N
P
Page 10
December, 11
Fig 301: PE Entry Bed (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Rollers (Carrying / Lifter /
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
(Standard) 24VDC photo
eye/solenoid with polarized
retro-reflective eye.
Right hand photo eye hand shown.
PRODUCT FLOW
(Under roller mount option)

24VDC
Sick
proximity
sensor.
Technical Data:
Side view.

18, 24, 30 and 36
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Slave rollers included at terminal end.

Bed is available in increments of 12 from 72 to 144. Specify in inches.
24V DC power supply, slug release module, and slug input module must be ordered separately.
All carrying, lifter, and slave rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
301
Section 2:
Sub
Class
PE
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
Zone
Length
Bed
2
Length
Frame
Type
Pulley
Face
Photo-Eye Skew
Angle
Photo-Eye
Hand
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
24
36
See
Note 2
N
P
Std.
MC
0
9
18
U
L
R

Figures
Page 11
December, 11
Fig 302: PE Entry Bed (External Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Rollers (Carrying / Lifter):
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:

24VDC
Sick
proximity
sensor.
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Terminal end assembly is not included with this entry bed.

All carrying and lifter rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
302
Section 2:
Sub
Class
PE
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
Zone
Length
Bed
2
Length
Frame
Type
Photo-Eye Skew
Angle
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
24
36
See
Note 2
N
P
0
9
18
U

Figures
Photo-Eye Hand
L
R
Page 12
December, 11
Fig 307: PE Intermediate Bed

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
PRODUCT FLOW

24VDC
Sick
proximity
sensor.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
Front view.
Notes:
1. Bed is available in zone length increments up to 144. Specify in inches.
2. 24V DC power supply, slug release module, and slug input module must be ordered separately.
3. All carrying and lifter rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
307
Section 2:
Sub
Class
PE
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
Zone
Length
Bed
1
Length
Frame Type
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
24
36
See
Note 1
N
P

Figures
Photo-Eye
Skew Angle
Photo-Eye
Hand
0
9
18
U
L
R
Page 13
December, 11
Fig 308: PE Intermediate Bed (with Roller Brake)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
PRODUCT FLOW

24VDC
Sick
proximity
sensor.
3/8"
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
2 1/4"
2 1/4"
6"
AIR OPERATED ROLLER BRAKE (AORB)
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bed is available in a length of 144.

When using pop-out frame, hold down strip (HDS) is provided for rollers over air brake (brake-side only).
How to Specify:
Quantity Figure
308
Section 2:
Sub
Class
PE
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
Zone
Length
Bed
1
Length
144
Frame
Type
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
24
36
See
Note 1
N
P

Figures
Discharge Control
SA w/0 Sol
SA w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SA w/1 Sol (24VDC)
Coated
Rollers @
AORB
Y
N
Photo-Eye
Skew Angle
Photo-Eye
Hand
0
9
18
U
L
R
Page 14
December, 11
Fig 312: PE Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
PRODUCT FLOW

24VDC Sick proximity
sensor.
Side view.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
5.

How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
312
Section 2:
Sub
Class
PE
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
Zone
Length
Bed
2
Length
144
Frame
Type
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
24
36
See
Note 2
N
P

Figures
Discharge Control
SA w/0 Sol
SA w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SA w/1 Sol (24VDC)
Pulley
Face
Photo-Eye
Skew Angle
Photo-Eye
Hand
Std.
MC
0
9
18
U
L
R
Page 15
December, 11
Fig 314: PE Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End with Roller Brake)
Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:

Slave):
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
PRODUCT FLOW

24VDC
Sick
proximity
sensor.
Side view.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

When using pop-out frame, hold down strip (HDS) is provided for rollers over air brake (brake-side only).
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig
314
Section 2:
Sub
Class
PE
Nom
Width
Roller
Center
Zone
Length
Bed
2
Length
144
Frame
Type
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
24
36
See
Note 2
N
P

Figures
Discharge Control
SA w/0 Sol
SA w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SA w/1 Sol (24VDC)
Coated
Rollers
@ AORB
Pulley
Face
Photo-Eye
Skew Angle
Photo-Eye
Hand
Y
N
Std.
MC
0
9
18
U
L
R
Page 16
December, 11
Fig 315: PE Exit Bed (External Terminal End with Roller Brake)
Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
PRODUCT FLOW

24VDC Sick proximity sensor.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Terminal end assembly is not included with this bed.

Bed is available in a length of 144 only with 54 long air operated roller brake (AORB).
When using pop-out frame, hold down strip (HDS) is provided for rollers over air brake (brake side only).
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig
315
Section 2:
Sub
Class
PE
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
Zone
Length
Bed
2
Length
144
Frame
Type
Discharge
Control
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
24
36
See
Note 2
N
P
SA w/0 Sol
SA w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SA w/1 Sol (24VDC)

Figures
Coated
Rollers
@ AORB
Y
N
Photo-Eye
Skew Angle
Photo-Eye
Hand
0
9
18
U
L
R
Page 17
December, 11
Fig 301: SA Entry Bed (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
Mechanical sensor roller
assembly, 1 7/8 dia., 16
ga. carrying rollers with
7/16 hex axles. 1 dia., 18
ga. actuating and counter
balance
rollers,
mechanically actuated air
valve.
3/8"
SLAVE ROLLERS
PRODUCT FLOW
INTERNAL TERMINAL END
Side view.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Zone length is 24.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
301
Sub
Class
SA
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
Bed
2
Length
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
See
Note 2

Figures
Frame Type Pulley Face

N
P
Std.
MC
Discharge
Control
Tandem
Sensors
SA w/o Sol.
SR w/o Sol.
Y
N
Page 18
December, 11
Fig 302: SA Exit Bed (External Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
Mechanical
sensor roller
balance
rollers,
valve.
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
Side view.
18, 24, 30 and 36
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Terminal end assembly is not included with this entry bed.

Zone length is 24.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
302
Sub
Class
SA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Roller
Center
2
3
4
Bed Length
See
Note 2
Frame Type
Discharge
Control
Tandem
Sensors
N
P
SA w/o Sol.
SR w/o Sol.
Y
N
Page 19
December, 11
Fig 307: SA Intermediate Bed

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
balance
rollers,
valve.
3/8"
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
Side view.
18, 24, 30 and 36
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Zone length is 24.
If required (slug release only), live roller solenoid control kit (SCK) must be ordered separately.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
307
Sub
Class
SA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Roller
Center
2
3
4
Bed Length
See
Note 1
Frame Type
Discharge Control
Tandem
Sensors
N
P
SA w/o Sol.
SR w/o Sol.
Y
N
Page 20
December, 11
Fig 308: SA Intermediate Bed (with Roller Brake)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
balance
rollers,
valve.
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
Side view.
18, 24, 30 and 36
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bed Lengths available in 144 only.

Zone length is 24.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
308
Sub
Class
SA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Roller
Center
2
3
4
Bed Length
144
See
Note 1
Frame
Type
Discharge
Control
Coated Rollers
@ AORB
Tandem
Sensors
N
P
SA w/o Sol.
SR w/o Sol.
Y
N
Y
N
Page 21
December, 11
Fig 312: SA Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
balance
rollers,
valve.
PRODUCT FLOW
Side view.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Bed is available in a length of 144 only.
Zone length is 24.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
312
Section 2:
Sub
Class
SA
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
2
3
4

Figures
Bed
2
Length
144
See
Note 2
Frame
Type
Discharge
Control
Pulley
Face
Tandem
Sensors
N
P
AP
SA w/o Sol
SR w/o Sol
SA w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SR w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SA or SR w/2 Sol (110 VAC)
SA w/1 Sol (24VDC)
SR w/1 Sol (24VDC)
SA or SR w/2 Sol (24VDC)
Std.
MC
Y
N
Page 22
December, 11
Fig 314: SA Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End with Roller Brake)
Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
balance
rollers,
valve.
PRODUCT FLOW
Side view.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zone length is 24.
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig
Sub
Class
314
SA
Section 2:
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
Bed
1
Length
Frame
Type
Discharge
Control
144
See
Note 1
N
P
SA w/o Sol
SR w/o Sol
SA w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SR w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SA w/1 Sol (24VDC)
SR w/1 Sol (24VDC)

Figures
Coated
Rollers
@ AORB
Pulley
Face
Tandem
Sensors
Y
N
Std.
MC
Y
N
Page 23
December, 11
Fig 315: SA Exit Bed (External Terminal End with Roller Brake)
Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Sensor:
Mechanical
sensor roller
balance
rollers,
valve.
PRODUCT FLOW
Side view.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Terminal end assembly is not included with this bed.

Zone length is 24.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
315
Section 2:
Sub
Class
SA
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
2
3
4

Figures
Bed
2
Length
144
See
Note 2
Frame
Type
Discharge
Control
Coated Rollers
@ AORB
Tandem
Sensors
N
P
SA w/o Sol
SR w/o Sol
SA w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SR w/1 Sol (110VAC)
SA w/1 Sol (24VDC)
SR w/1 Sol (24VDC)
Y
N
Y
N
Page 24
December, 11
Fig 301: TA Entry Bed (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.
SLAVE ROLLERS
PRODUCT FLOW
3/8"
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
3. All carrying, lifter, and slave rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
Sub Class
301
TA

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
See
Note 2
Frame Type
Pulley Face
N
P
Std.
MC
Page 25
December, 11
Fig 302: TA Entry Bed (External Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
3/8"
PRODUCT FLOW
Side view.
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
1. Terminal end assembly is not included with this entry bed.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
302
Sub Class
TA

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
See
Note 2
Frame Type
N
P
Page 26
December, 11
Fig 303: TA Entry Bed (Side Mount End Drive)

Components:
Bed Section:
(6DE) 10 deep x 1 3/8
isolators included.
(8DE) 12 deep x 1 3/8
isolators included.
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Right hand drive shown.
72"
SLAVE ROLLERS
PRODUCT FLOW
6"

7/16 hex axles.
Side view.
NOMINAL
WIDTH +1/4"
15"
MAX.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Capacity:
10"
(6DE) 375# effective belt

pull
(8DE) 600# belt pull
2"
Front view.
Notes:
3. When no entry end drop kit is specified, a terminal end cover is provided.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Figure
303
Sub
Class
TA
Model
6DE
8DE
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
Bed
1
Length
72
See
Note 1
Frame
Type
Drive
Hand
Pulley
Face
N
P
L
R
Std.
MC
FPM
HP
Soft
Start
Drive
Train
Sprocket
Hub Type
Y
N
Belt
Chain
Std.
QD
See Horsepower
Calculations*
Entry
End
Drop
Kit
LR
1
BC
2
BC
GV
None
1
Belt conveyor 4TE or 5TE drop kit.
2
Belt conveyor 6TE drop kit.
Section 2:

Figures
Page 27
December, 11
Fig 304: TA Entry Bed Alignment Section (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.
Right hand drive with guide rail shown.
PRODUCT FLOW
SLAVE ROLLERS
3/8"
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
6"
NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH x 2 - 5 3/4"
2"
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Slave rollers are included at terminal end

Alignment section guide rail kit must be ordered separately.
Available with 2 roller centers and non-pop-out frame only.
Includes belt guard kit.
Includes splice angles.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
304
Sub Class
TA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
144
See
Note 2
Assembly Hand
Discharge Control
Pulley Face
L
R
TA w/ 0 Sol
TA w/ 1 Sol (110VAC)
TA w/ 1 Sol (24VDC)
Std.
MC
Page 28
December, 11
Fig 305: TA Entry Bed Merge Section (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.

SLAVE ROLLERS
PRODUCT FLOW
3/8"
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
6"
NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH x 2 + 6 1/4"
2"
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Alignment section guide rail kit must be ordered separately.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
305
Sub
Class
TA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
144
See
Note 2
Assembly Hand
Discharge Control
Pulley Face
L
R
TA w/ 0 Sol
TA w/ 1 Sol (24VDC)
Std.
MC
Page 29
December, 11
Fig 306: TA Entry Bed Divert Section (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.
PRODUCT FLOW
SLAVE ROLLERS
3/8"
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
6"
7"
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Assembly includes divert arm.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
306
Sub Class
TA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
144
See
Note 2
Discharge Control
Pulley Face
TA w/ 0 Sol
TA w/ 1 Sol (24VDC)
Std.
MC
Page 30
December, 11
Fig 307: TA Intermediate Bed

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
3/8"
PRODUCT FLOW
Side view.
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
2. If required, live roller solenoid control kit (SCK) must be ordered separately.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
307
Sub Class
TA

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
Bed Length
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
See
Note 1
Frame Type
N
P
Page 31
December, 11
Fig 309: TA Intermediate Bed Divert Section

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
PRODUCT FLOW
Side view.
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Assembly includes divert arm.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
309
Sub Class
TA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
144
See
Note 1
Discharge Control
TA w/ 0 Sol
TA w/ 1 Sol (24VDC)
Page 32
December, 11
Fig 310: TA Intermediate Bed Merge Section

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Technical Data:
Right hand assembly with guide rail shown.
18, 24, 30 and 36

PRODUCT FLOW
Side view.
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Merge section guide rail kit must be ordered separately
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
310
Sub Class
TA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
144
See
Note 1
Assembly Hand
Discharge Control
L
R
TA w/ 0 Sol
TA w/ 1 Sol (24VDC)
Page 33
December, 11
Fig 311: TA Intermediate Bed Sawtooth Merge

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
60"
NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
45
NO
IN
M
AL
O
EY
NV
CO
SUPPORT LOCATIONS RECOMMENDED (APPROX)

GUARD RAIL
R
TH
ID
W
Top view.
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Live rail guide rail kit must be ordered separately
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
311
Sub Class
TA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
60
See
Note 1
Assembly Hand
L
R
Page 34
December, 11
Fig 312: TA Exit Bed (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.
PRODUCT FLOW
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
Front view.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
312
Sub
Class
TA
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
2
3
4

Figures
Bed Length
144
See
Note 2
Frame Type
Discharge Control
Pulley Face
N
P
TA w/ 0 Sol
TA w/ 1 Sol (24VDC)
Std.
MC
Page 35
December, 11
Fig 313: TA Exit Bed (External Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
3/8"
PRODUCT FLOW
Side view.
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
1. Terminal end assembly is not included with this exit bed.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
313
Sub Class
TA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Roller
Center
2
3
4
Bed Length
144
See
Note 2
Frame Type
Discharge Control
N
P
TA w/ 0 Sol
TA w/ 1 Sol (24VDC)
Page 36
December, 11
Fig 316: TA Exit Bed Merge Section (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.

SLAVE ROLLERS
PRODUCT FLOW
3/8"
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
Side view.
6"
2"
Front view.
Notes:
1. Slave rollers are included at terminal end.
3. Merge Section Guide Rail Kit must be ordered separately.
4. Available with 2 roller centers and non-pop-out frame only.
5. Includes splice angles.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
316
Sub
Class
TA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
144
See
Note 2
Assembly Hand
Discharge Control
Pulley Face
L
R
TA w/ 0 Sol
TA w/ 1 Sol (24VDC)
Std.
MC
Page 37
December, 11
Fig 317: TA Exit Bed Divert Section (Internal Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
Pulley:
Slave):
7/16 hex axle.
Right hand assembly.
PRODUCT FLOW
SLAVE ROLLERS
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
3/8"
Side view.
6"
7"
Front view.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Slave rollers are included at terminal end.

Assembly includes air-operated divert arm.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Figure
317
Sub Class
TA
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 2:

Figures
Bed Length
144
See
Note 2
Discharge Control
Pulley Face
TA w/ 0 Sol
TA w/ 1 Sol (24VDC)
Std.
MC
Page 38
December, 11
Fig 318: TA Exit / Entry Bed (External Terminal End)

Components:
Bed Section:
Drive Belt:
7/16 hex axle.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
3/8"
PRODUCT FLOW
Side view.
6"
1 3/8"
Front view.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 2:
Figure
318
Sub Class
TA

Figures
Nominal Width
Roller Center
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
Bed Length
144
See
Note 1
Frame Type
N
P
Page 39
December, 11

Section 3:
(LR) Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor:

Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
6CD, 8CD & 10CD: 6, 8 & 10 Chain / Belt & Sprocket Driven Center Drives..................... 3
6CD, 8CD & 10CD: 6, 8 &10 Direct Drive Center Drives Assemblies................................. 4
6DE and 8DE: 6 and 8 Direct Drive End Drive Assembly..................................................... 5
4HTU and 5HTU: 4 and 5 Horizontal Take-Up ....................................................................... 6
STU: Swing Take-Up................................................................................................................... 7
6TE: Terminal end Module ......................................................................................................... 8
44SLV: 4 Slave Terminal End Module ..................................................................................... 9
TEC: Terminal End Covers ...................................................................................................... 10
CCR: Coated Carrying Roller................................................................................................... 11
LRZB: LR Zone Brake............................................................................................................... 11
HORS: Hand Operated Roller Stop ......................................................................................... 12
FORS: Foot Operated Roller Stop ........................................................................................... 13
AORS: Air Operated Roller Stop ............................................................................................. 14
A/M GRK: Alignment / Merge Guard Rail Kit .......................................................................... 15
SCK: Solenoid Control Kit ....................................................................................................... 16
ZCK: Zone Control Kit (Exit to Entry Bed).............................................................................. 16
PSK: Proximity Switch Kit ....................................................................................................... 17
WEMK: Wheel Encoder Mounting Kit ..................................................................................... 17
FRK: Filter Regulator Kit.......................................................................................................... 18
SSK: Soft Start Kit .................................................................................................................... 18
TWK: Turning Wheel Kit........................................................................................................... 19
BGK: Belt Guard Kit ................................................................................................................. 19
USA: Unsupported Splice Angle ............................................................................................. 20
SK: Skew Kit (3 Roller Centers)............................................................................................. 20
PEPS: Photo-Eye Power Supply ............................................................................................. 21
IO/SIM: Isolated Output / Slug Input Module .......................................................................... 22
SIL: Slug Isolation Link ............................................................................................................ 23
ZEJ: Zone Extention Jumper ................................................................................................... 23
Section 3:

Page 2
December, 11
NOMINAL CONVEYORWIDTH + 1/4"
6CD, 8CD & 10CD: 6, 8 & 10 Chain / Belt & Sprocket Driven Center Drives
62 1/8" FOR LONG SPRINGS

34 3/8" FOR SHORT SPRINGS
43 3/4
15 1/4" FOR 6CD & 8CD

17 1/4" FOR 10CD
6CD Right Hand Shown, Left Hand Opposite
Components:
construction.
bushings.
(10CD) 10 dia. Crowned face with 1 11/16 dia. Fatigue Proof shaft,
QD bushings.
Take-Up Pulley:
1-3/16 dia. shaft.
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:
Long Springs (18)
Short Springs (8)
Manual take-up (optional):
30 effective belt take-up.
Chain and Belt Driven Train - Nominal Speed at 60 Hz. (FPM) for 6CD, 8CD, and 10CD
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
Notes:
1. Motor drip pan Included.
2. Maximum number of Long Springs is (3). Maximum number of Short Springs is (4).
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
6CD
8CD
10CD
Nominal
Width
Drive
Hand
18
24
30
36
L
R
FPM
HP
See.
Horsepower
Calculations*
Motor Drive
None
Soft Start
AutoFreq 230V
AutoFreq 460V
Drive
Train
Sprocket
Hub Type
Pulley
Face
Belt
Chain
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
Take-Up
2L or 2S
3L or 3S
4S
Manual
Section 3:

Page 3
December, 11
6CD, 8CD & 10CD: 6, 8 &10 Direct Drive Center Drives Assemblies
Components:
construction.
bushings.
(10CD) 10 dia. Crowned Face with 1 11/16 dia. Fatigue Proof shaft,
QD bushings.
Take-Up Pulley:
1-3/16 dia. shaft.
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:
Long Springs (18)
Short Springs (8)
Direct Drive Train - Nominal Speed at 60 Hz. (FPM) for 6CD, 8CD, and 10CD
6CD
8CD
10CD
60
60
100
80
80
120
100
100
160
120
120
190
160
160
240
200
200
320
260
260
400
320
320
440
400
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
Nominal Width
6CD
8CD
10CD
18
24
30
36
Drive
Hand
L
R
FPM
HP
See.
Horsepower
Calculations*
Motor Drive
None
Soft Start
AutoFreq 230V
AutoFreq 460V
Pulley
Face
Std.
MC
Take-Up
2L or 2S
3L or 3S
4S
Manual
Section 3:

Page 4
December, 11
6DE and 8DE: 6 and 8 Direct Drive End Drive Assembly
Components:
(6DE) 6 dia. crowned face with 1-3/16 dia. cold finished shaft. Welded
construction.
(8DE) 8 Dia. crowned Face with 1 7/16 dia. Fatigue Proof Shaft, QD
bushings.
Technical Data:
Drive Capacity:
(6DE) 375# effective belt pull
(8DE) 600# effective belt pull
Direct Drive Train - Nominal Speed at 60 Hz. (FPM) for 6CD, 8CD, and 10CD
6DE
8DE
60
60
80
80
100
100
120
120
160
160
200
200
260
260
320
320
Notes:
1. Available with 2 roller centers and non-pop-out (roller) frames only.
2. Module available in a length of 18 only.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
6DE
8DE
Nominal
Width
Drive
Hand
18
24
30
36
L
R
FPM
HP
See.
Horsepower
Calculations*
Motor
Drive
None
Soft Start
AF230V
AF460V
Pulley Face
Std.
MC
Entry End
Drop Kit
FEC - Full End Cover
BC1 - 4TE or 5TE
BC2 - 6TE-HD
GV1 - 2.5 GV
GV2 - 3.5 GV
LR1 - 6 LR
LR2 - 8 LS
VB1 - 10 VB
Section 3:

Page 5
December, 11
4HTU and 5HTU: 4 and 5 Horizontal Take-Up

Components:
Pulley:
(HTU4):
4 dia. crowned face with
greased for life internal
bearings for a 1 3/16 dia. shaft.
(HTU5):
5 dia. crowned face with
greased for life internal
bearings for a 1 3/16 dia. shaft.
Rollers (Snub):
shaft.
Side Frame:
Technical Data:
Long Springs (18)
Short Springs (8)
18, 24, 30 and 36
Belt length:
(4HTU) 3-3required per unit.
(5HTU) 3-11 required per unit.
2L Springs (Automatic) HTU Shown
Notes:
automatic take-up, should a manual take-up be used. (*See HTU Horizontal Take-Up for more details)
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
Nominal Width
Pulley Face
Take Up
4HTU
5HTU
18
24
30
Std.
MC
2L or 2S
3L or 3S
4S
Manual

Page 6
December, 11
STU: Swing Take-Up

Components:
Rollers (Snub):
shaft.
Side Frame:
Technical Data:
Take-up:
4 maximum belt take-up.
18, 24, 30 and 36.
Belt length:
FLOW
6"
BE
LT
11" Max.
Side View
NOMINAL CONVEYOR
WIDTH + 1/4"
26 1/4"
Top View
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
STU
Nominal
Width
18
24
30
36
Section 3:

Page 7
December, 11
6TE: Terminal end Module

Components:
Bed Section:
12 long x 10 high x 1 3/8
flange. Includes axle isolators.
Pulley:
1 7/16 dia., welded shaft.
Rollers (Carrying):
1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga., ABEC-1
precision bearings, and 7/16
hex axle.
Rollers (Snub):
shaft.
Side Frame and Terminal End Cover Have Been Removed for Clarity. (above)
Technical Data:
Capacity:
680 lbs. effective belt pull.
18, 24, 30 and 36.
Belt length:
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
6 Pulley has crowned face, 1 7/16 diameter welded shaft. Slave rollers included over drive pulley.
Module available in a length of 12 only.
Entry end drop kit not required for V-belt conveyor.
When no entry end drop kit is specified a terminal end cover will be provided.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
6TE
Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
Frame
Type
Pulley Face
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
N
P
Std.
MC

Entry End
Drop Kit
LR
GV
None
Page 8
December, 11
44SLV: 4 Slave Terminal End Module

Components:
Bed Section:
12 long x 6 high x 1 3/8
flange, 10 ga. galvanized
channel frame. Includes axle
isolators.
Pulley:
1 3/16 dia., D hubs.
Rollers (Carrying):
1 7/8 dia. x 16 Ga., ABEC-1
precision bearings, and 7/16
hex axle.
Technical Data:
Capacity:
140 lbs. effective belt pull
18, 24, 30 and 36
Belt length:
(drive side) + 1-1 required per
unit.
(driven side) + 1-1 required
per unit.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Slave rollers included over pulleys.

Module available in a length of 12 only.
Available slave ratios for speed increase are 1:2 to 1:1 in 10%.
Available slave ratios for speed reductions are 1:1 to 2:1 in 10%.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
44SLV
Drive Hand
R - Right
L - Left
Section 3:

Nominal
Width
Roller
Center
Frame
Type
Sprocket
Hub Type
Pulley
Face
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
N
P
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
Slave Ratio
3-4
See
Notes 3 & 4
Page 9
December, 11
TEC: Terminal End Covers

4 Terminal End Cover:
Terminal end cover guards against
pinch points associated with terminal
end pulleys.
Not required if
conveyor is connecting to another inline conveyor.
4 End Stop / Terminal End Cover:
Terminal end stop to hold back
product, includes built in terminal
end cover to guard against pinch
points associated with terminal end
pulleys.
End Cover Kit (at Lift Gate Exit):
4 1/2 high end cover guards against
pinch points associated with lift gate
pulleys.
4 1/2
COVER
6 Terminal End or Drive End

Cover:
end pulleys. Not required if conveyor
is connecting to another in-line
conveyor.
All 6TEs and 6DEs
ordered without entry end drop kits will
automatically be provided with a
terminal end cover.
6 Terminal End Cover Shown
8 End Drive Cover:

end pulleys. Not required if conveyor
is connecting to another in-line
conveyor. All 8DEs ordered without
drop kits will automatically be provided
with a terminal end cover.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
Width
4TE Cover
4TE End Stop / Cover
LR4TE Cover
6TE/6DE Cover
8DE Cover
18
24
30
36

Page 10
December, 11
CCR: Coated Carrying Roller

"A"
"B"
1 5/8"
7/16" HEX
1 3/8" REF.
N.O.A.W.
18
24
30
36
2 1/2" REF.
BR
15 1/2
21 1/2
27 1/2
33 1/2
A
16 1/2
22 1/2
28 1/2
34 1/2
B
15 3/8
21 3/8
27 3/8
33 3/8
Components:
Tubing:
1 5/8 dia. x 16 ga.
galvanized steel tubing.
Axle:
7/16 steel hex, spring
retained.
Bearing:
Cover:
Polyurethane.
Technical Data:
Capacity:
100lbs.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
CCR
Width
18
24
30
36
LRZB: LR Zone Brake

Description:
The live roller zone brake
assembly is designed as a preassembled field installation kit.
It provides roller braking to
create
a
non-contact
accumulation zone in any
section of the conveyor bed.
It is designed for all live roller
accumulation beds with roller
centers at any of the available
spacing increments.
UP TO 5/16" TRAVEL
(REF. ONLY)
1/2" PAD
10 1/4
2 3/8
(REF) BRAKE SHOWN IN

DOWN POSITION WITH
ACTUATORS EXTENDED.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
LRZB

Page 11
December, 11
HORS: Hand Operated Roller Stop

Description:
Manually operated hand lever
with ball grip raises pivoting
stop roller from carrying roller
position to stop roller position.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
HORS

Width
Device Control Hand
18
24
30
36
L-Left
R-Right
B-Both
Page 12
December, 11
FORS: Foot Operated Roller Stop

Description:
Depressing foot pedal drops the
stop roller from its normally up
position.
Included foot pedal
latch may be installed to hold
stop roller in down position.
The Foot Operated Roller Stop
requires a minimum top of roller
elevation of 24.
Right Hand Shown, Left Hand Opposite.
Notes:
1. Foot pedal latch accessory should only be installed when application requires stop to be held in down
position.
2. Latch may be floor mounted on either side of the pedal.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
FORS
Width
18
24
30
36
Section 3:

Page 13
December, 11
AORS: Air Operated Roller Stop

Description:
Pneumatic
cylinder
raises
pivoting roller from carrying roller
position to stop roller elevation.
Pneumatic cylinder is controlled by
your choice: solenoid, pneumatic
foot switch with stop roller in the
normally up position, pneumatic
detented foot switch to hold stop
roller in either the up or down
position, or a pneumatic hand
switch. Includes tube and fittings.
Components: (Device Options)
Solenoid Control Kit Shown
Solenoid Control Kit
Pneumatic Foot Switch (Normally Up)
Pneumatic Foot Switch (Detented)
Pneumatic Hand Switch
Notes:
1. Operating air pressure is 18 PSI. It can be connected to the live roller air manifold.
2. Control device may be installed on the right hand side or left hand side of the conveyor.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
FORS

Width
Control Device
18
24
30
36
110V AC Solenoid
Foot Switch Norm. Up
Foot Switch -Detented
Hand Switch
None
Page 14
December, 11
A/M GRK: Alignment / Merge Guard Rail Kit

Description:
To be used with live roller
alignment tables and merge
tables.
Lower guide rail is
always live skatewheel.
For
optional second tier guide rail
choose adjustable tube or
adjustable channel.
Includes clips
hard-ware.
and
mounting
Right Hand Shown, Left Hand Opposite.
1 Hi Alignment
2 Hi Adjustable Channel
2 Hi Adjustable Tube
Notes:
1. Maximum distance for top of rail to top of second tier guide rail is 11 11/16.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
Nominal Width
Style
Alignment
Merge
Sawtooth
18
24
30
36
1 Hi
2 Hi Adj. Channel
2 Hi Adj. Tube

Page 15
December, 11
SCK: Solenoid Control Kit

Description:
Single solenoid valve, spring
return, 3/8 ports.
Used when an independent
air control is desired, such as
when the slug release option
is chosen on an intermediate
singulation air (SA/SR) bed.
Includes
fittings
mounting bracket.
and
How to Specify:
Qty.
Model
SCK
ZCK: Zone Control Kit (Exit to Entry Bed)

Description:
Enables the continuation of an
active
accumulation
zone
through the exit to entry
terminal ends of a singulation
air
(SA)
or
photo-eye
accumulation (PE) conveyor.
Eliminates the need for a line
full photo-eye and solenoid
valve typically required at
conveyor
terminal
end
transition.
P.E. Shown
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Sub Class
LR
Model
Roller Center
(PE only)
Zone Length
(PE Only)
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
24
36
ZCK
PE
SA
Section 3:
Nominal Width
(SA Only)

Page 16
December, 11
PSK: Proximity Switch Kit

Description:
Uses a mechanical sensor roller to
activate an electronic proximity
switch.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
PSK
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
WEMK: Wheel Encoder Mounting Kit

Description:
For mounting a Photocraft wheel
encoder assembly to the underside
of a live roller conveyor bed.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Sub Class
LR
Model
WEMK
PE
SA
Section 3:
Nominal Width
(SA Only)

18
24
30
36
Page 17
December, 11
FRK: Filter Regulator Kit

Description:
Combination filter / regulator and shutoff valve. Port size 3/8 NPT.
Includes fittings and mounting bracket.
Technical Data:
Pressure
Maximum 30 psi
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
FRK
SSK: Soft Start Kit

Description:
Electric soft start with disconnect.
Used when Hard Start Belt Pull
exceeds 1100 lbs.
Includes mounting bracket. Mounts to
center drive or end drive frame near
motor/reducer.
If soft start control kit is not used,
another type of soft start control must
be used.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
SSK

Page 18
December, 11
TWK: Turning Wheel Kit

Components:
Wheel:
6 dia. rubber wheel with slotted
mounting bracket.
Bracket:
12 ga. formed sheet steel brackets.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
TWK
BGK: Belt Guard Kit

Description:
Required at locations where a belt
pinch point exists when connecting a
non-popout frame to a popout frame or
when connecting live roller to a V-Belt
M1 series slave module.
Mounting
included.
brackets
and
hardware
Components:
Guard:
7/16 hex steel guard.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
BGK
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
Section 3:

Page 19
December, 11
USA: Unsupported Splice Angle

Description:
Used when a splice is to be made
between two live roller beds and there is
no floor support directly beneath the
splice.
Components:
Angle:
10 ga. formed sheet steel.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
USA
SK: Skew Kit (3 Roller Centers)

Description:
Allows rollers on live roller conveyor to
be skewed in either direction.
Components:
Skew Kit:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
SK

Page 20
December, 11
PEPS: Photo-Eye Power Supply

Description:
Power Supply:
Integrated AC junction box,
120VAC/1.5
amp
input
voltage power supply unit.
Two flush mount 3-pin
Molex output connection
terminals deliver 4 amps @
24VCD to the photo-eye
accumulation conveyor.
Enclosure:
NEMA 1 enclosure
Slug Release Input:
Allows a 15-132 VAC or DC
input signal to be connected
to the accumulation system
Connectors:
(2) 40 4 wire leads with
Molex connectors.
Cables:
(2) 6 accessory cables.
LED Indicator:
DC power failure.
Notes:
1. One power supply is required for each photo eye accumulation conveyor. Powers 75 zones maximum,
regardless of zone length.
2. Includes power supply, cables, and mounting bracket.
3. Enclosure mounts to the inside of the conveyor side frame.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
PEPS

Page 21
December, 11
IO/SIM: Isolated Output / Slug Input Module

Description:
Monitors the beam status of the
eye to which it is connected
thereby
allowing
an
accumulation photo-eye to also
function as a line full photo-eye
or other system function.
Accumulation
function
is
controlled locally while IO/SIM
module provides a 110V signal
to the PLC for system control
functions.
Components:
Enclosure:
4 square electrical box.
Slug Release Input:
Allows a 15-132 VAC or DC
input signal to be connected
to the accumulation system.
Terminals:
(2) sets of quick connecting
terminals:
(a) PLC Slug signal input.
(b) PLC line full output.
Connectors:
(2) 40 4 wire leads with
Molex connectors.
Notes:
1. One module is required per slug zone.
2. One module is required per system function. (Example: Full line photo eye).
3. The enclosure gets mounted directly to the inside of the conveyor side frame.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
LR
Model
IO / SIM

Page 22
December, 11
SIL: Slug Isolation Link

Description:
Used for slug signal termination
in a conveyor with a slug release
zone not continuous for the full
length of the conveyor. This
device is a link between a male
and female Molex connector of
two photo-eyes.
Notes:
1. One link is required per slug zone.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
SIL
ZEJ: Zone Extention Jumper

Description:
A 40 or 15-0 4-wire lead with
Molex connectors. It can be
installed between any two photoeyes along the conveyor. Used
as a zone connection between
photo-eyes to create zones
larger than 36 or to bypass nonaccumulation sections within an
accumulation conveyor.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
LR
Model
ZEJ
Length
40
15-0
Section 3:

Page 23
December, 11
Shaft Driven Live Roller Conveyor

Effective April 15, 2013
The LS Line Shaft product line is now part of our Obsolescence Program, and is no longer
available as a standard product. We highly recommend your consideration of alternatives to
the LS line. Please contact your Regional Sales Manager, or the Factory, if you have any
questions.
LS replacement parts will be available for approx. 5 years, through 12/31/2017.
We will honor the standard warranty for existing LS equipment.
Section 1:
Shaft Driven Live Roller:

Page 1
April, 13
V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor

Section 1:
V-Belt Driven Live Roller:

Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
Theory of Operation:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Overall Operation and Usage: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Typical Applications: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Capabilities: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Basic Design Features:----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Flow Rate: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Application Guidelines:---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor Configurations:----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Determining Maximum Tangent Lengths------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Overall Tangent -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Locating the Drive ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Technical Data: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Horsepower Calculations: Formula---------------------------------------------------------------------------Horsepower Calculations: Worksheet -----------------------------------------------------------------------Horsepower Calculations: Formula Charts -----------------------------------------------------------------
12
14
17
18
Chart No. 1: Speed Constant (lbs.) for use in HP Calculation Formula ---------------------------------------------------------18
Chart No. 2: Length of Power Curve Measured at Centerline ---------------------------------------------------------------------19
Chart No. 3A: Drive HP Selection (for Modules M43 with a Chain Drive)-------------------------------------------------------20
Chart No. 3B: Drive HP Selection (for Modules M43 with a Synchronous Drive Belt) ---------------------------------------21
Chart No. 3C: Drive HP Selection (for Modules M42, M55 and M56)------------------------------------------------------------22
Chart No. 4: Slave Speed Ratio / Number of Drive / Driven Sprocket Teeth (For Calculating EBPS Requirements) 23
Chart No. 3C: Drive HP Selection (for Modules M42, M55 and M56)------------------------------------------------------------23
Chart No. 5: Shaft Diameter Requirements --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------23
V-Belt Conveyor Dimensions: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26

Calculation of V-Belt Conveyor Weights: (Lbs.) ----------------------------------------------------------- 32
Components Weight ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 33
Section 1:

Page 2
December, 11
V-Belt conveyor is considered to be live roller conveyor since the product
load is carried directly on top of carrying rollers. A B section V-Belt,
positioned in contact with the bottom of the rollers, provides the driving force
for these rollers.
V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor can be used with any product load having
a flat, firm riding surface and is free of protrusions that could hinder the
product load from traveling over the rollers.
The typical applications for V-Belt Driven Live Roller conveyor:
Transportation:
To move product from point A to point B including directional changes wherein product is transported through
a curve.
Transfer:
Used in conjunction with sortation devices to transfer product to or from a main trunk line, work station,
secondary lines, palletizing area, etc.
Alignment:
Sections of straight v-belt conveyor wherein the carrying rollers are skewed to move product to one side of
the conveyor or the other.
Capabilities:
V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor is primarily for horizontal transportation and alignment of product. It allows for the
redirecting of product loads through the use of curves, junctions, merges and skewed roller sections. Curved V-Belt
Driven Live Roller Conveyor can make directional changes of nearly any system typical angle. Junctions provide a
means of carrying product loads while they are being redirected to or from a main trunk line, work stations, secondary
lines or palletizing areas.

Automotions V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor incorporates a modular bolt together design enabling the system
engineer to apply numerous job specific configurations from a handful of standard modular components. The drive
belt (B-Section V-Belt) gets pressed up against the bottom surface of the carrying rollers by a series of fixed pressure
sheaves. These pressure sheaves are mounted to the side frame between the carrying rollers and beneath the belt.
A sheave is a flat pulley-like device that is grooved to keep the belt from slipping off of it. Sheaves are manufactured
with a V in the groove to better accept the V shape of the belt. A V-Belt take-up is utilized to keep tension on the
belt. The driving force between the carrying rollers and the belt of a V-Belt conveyor is provided by these fixed
pressure sheaves.
True tapered rollers are used in all standard radius curves. When product enters a curve equipped with true taper
rollers, product exits in the same orientation as it entered. In tight radius curves where non-true tapered rollers are
utilized, product may experience some rotation from its original orientation.
Section 1:

Page 3
December, 11
Flow Rate:
Carton Feet Per Minute (CFPM) of V-Belt
Driven Live Roller Conveyor is at best 95% of
the conveyors speed (approximately). This
rate is determined by the speed of the
adjoining conveyors. V-Belt Driven Live Roller
Conveyor should run at a rate 10% -20%
faster than the speed of the conveyor feeding
it. This is done in order to eliminate the
chance of product corners coming in contact
with one another and possibly causing jams
while negotiating curves.
Section 1:

Page 4
December, 11
V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor is essentially a Live Roller Conveyor that transports with no pressure between the
product. This provides a safe and effective way to transfer varying sizes and fragile products through directional
changes without causing product to shift into a side-by-side orientation, which can result in jams and possible damage
to the product.
Minimum Product Length

6 long on 2 carrying roller centers
Conveyable Items: In general, any item with a flat, continuous and rigid bottom surface can be conveyed on
a V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor. This includes such items as cartons, cases, totes, pans, trays, etc.
Care should be taken when the product to be conveyed is at the outside of a curve where distance between
roller centers becomes greater.
Item Weight: A V-Belt conveyor will convey product loads between 4 lbs./ft and 125 lbs./ft.
Product Flow: While V-Belt conveyors are reversible, they should always be configured to accommodate the
primary directional flow. When configuring a v-belt conveyor, the drive should be located so the belt is pulled
rather than pushed. Once system flow is determined, the module supplying power to the unit should be
located at the entry end.
Horizontal Operation: V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor is designed to operate as a horizontal conveyor.
Minimum Top of Roller: Minimum distance from the floor to the top of roller is 15 except for module M43,
which is 17.
Roller Spacing: Product loads carried on a V-Belt Live Roller Conveyor should be supported by three rollers
at all times. In situations where the bottom of the product load is not rigid the contents within the package
may cause the load to sag between the carrying rollers. If 2 roller centers do not alleviate this problem, a
powered belt curve conveyor must be used. Live load will also determine the maximum roller centers.
The cartons should also be supported by a minimum of two powered carrying rollers at all times. Automotion
V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor utilizes slaved carrying rollers in all modules to meet this requirement.
Conveyor Speed: V-Belt conveyors are available with standard fixed speeds of 70 through 180 feet per
minute in increments of 10 feet per minute, 200 through 320 feet per minute in increments of 20 feet per
minute, and 360 through 600 feet per minute in increments of 40 feet per minute. For any application
requiring slower or faster speeds consult Automotion. Refer to Chart No. 4 at the end of this section for slave
speed ratios for slave modules.
Note: 120, 240, and 480 fpm speeds are not available on module M42.
Line Pressure: Line pressure developed on a blocked V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor may cause product
loads to shift and jam. For this reason, accumulation should never be permitted.
Section 1:

Page 5
December, 11
Environmental Conditions: V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor is designed to operate within the normal
temperature and atmospheric conditions found in plants and warehouses. Several conditions to watch for
include:
High Temperatures
Do not use a V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor in an application where the ambient temperature exceeds
130F. All of the components are within safe operating limits up to this temperature.
Low Temperatures
Do not use a V-Belt Conveyor in applications where the ambient temperature falls below 40F. The V-Belt
conveyor is not to be used in cold room or freezer applications.
Oily Conditions
Applications that expose the carrying rollers to an oily mist or to dripping oil are not recommended. The small
belt contact with the carrying rollers on a V-Belt Conveyor in this condition will not provide a reliable driving
force.
Corrosive Or Abusive Conditions Shaft Driven Live Roller conveyor should not come into contact with
corrosive or abrasive materials as they will adversely affect components. Refer to the Automotion
Engineering Department for further details on wash down applications.
Wash Down Conditions V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor may be used in wash down applications after
extensive alterations. Consult Automotion.
Product Alignment: When possible, product should always be aligned to the V-belt side of the conveyor. In
applications such as a skew bed, it is recommended to move the product toward, rather than away from, the
V-belt side of the conveyor.
Section 1:

Page 6
December, 11
Determining System Width: An important factor in conveyor layout design is the products ability to
negotiate a curved conveyor section. Typically, it is preferred to have the product maintain its original
orientation through the curve.
The following formula is used to determine the necessary conveyor width a product requires to travel through
a curve while still maintaining 2 of clearance through the turn.
Curve Selection Chart (Standard Curve)*
Carton Width (in.)
Section 1:
12
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36

15
Carton Length (in.)

18
21
24
18
Wide
24
Wide
30
Wide
36
Wide
42
Wide
27
30
33
36
Page 7
December, 11
Curve Selection Chart (Tight Radius Curve)*
Carton Width (in.)
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
12
15
Carton Length (in.)

18
21
24
18
Wide
24
Wide
30
Wide
27
30
33
36
*System widths are calculated assuming product is aligned to the inside of the curve. If product is not properly aligned
to the inside of the curve small cartons may not negotiate the curve properly resulting in jams or damage to product. S
curves, in particular, should be evaluated to ensure proper handling and orientation of small product through the curve.
V-Belt Skewed Roller Beds: Skewed roller beds provide lateral

travel for aligning product to one side of the conveyor. Product
traveling across a skewed roller bed will gradually move to the left or
right of the conveyor, depending on the direction of the skew, until it
rides along the live guardrail at the edge of the conveyor.
Skew beds are available in 48 to 120 lengths in 12 increments.
When lengths of more than 120 are required, two skewed roller
beds may be connected together with an M2 series module to
achieve the required lateral travel. However, if a second skew bed is
not desired, a curve can be ordered with a longer intermediate
tangent and the rollers can be skewed in the field at time of
installation
Note: The modules attached to the ends of the skew bed do not skew and, therefore, should not be included
when calculating the required skew length.
To calculate the required skew bed length, first determine
Lateral Travel in inches using the following formula:
Lateral Travel = System Width - Minimum Product Width
In the chart to the right locate the Lateral Travel Factor for
the corresponding conveyor width and roller center of your
system.
Lateral Travel per 1 of Skew

Nominal
Width
3 Roller
Centers
2 Roller
Centers
18
1.5/ft.
1.5/ft
24
1.6/ft
1.1/ft
30
1.3/ft
0.8/ft
36
1.4/ft
0.7/ft
Use the following formula to determine the required length of the skew bed in feet and round up to the nearest
foot: Skew Bed Length = Lateral Travel / Lateral Travel Factor
For example, assume you have a 36 system with 3 roller centers and your minimum product width is 9.
Your Lateral Travel is 27 (36 minus 9). Your Lateral Travel Factor is 1.4/ft. Divide 27 by 1.4/ft. and your
result is 19.28. Rounding up to the nearest foot you would need 20 of skew bed to achieve the proper lateral
travel.
Section 1:

Page 8
December, 11
Skewing Rollers in Intermediate Tangents:
A 60 degree curve (Figure 403) with skewed rollers in the intermediate tangent.
Section 1:

Page 9
December, 11
V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor Configurations:

V-Belt conveyor figures are assembled from two V-Belt sub-divisions: Primary Sections and Modules. The Primary
Section is the part of the conveyor defining its intended function such as turning, transporting, or aligning a carton.
Modules, attached to either end of the primary section, provide power transmission and mounting configuration.
Modules also define the location where the v-belt connecting to the adjacent conveyor exits the module. Modules are
divided into five groups:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
M1 Series V-Belt is slaved off of a Live Roller conveyor Drive Beds

M2 Series V-Belt is slaved off of another V-Belt conveyor.
M3 Series V-Belt is slaved off of a Belt conveyor.
M4 Series V-Belt take-up or drive terminal ends.
M5 Series V-Belt take-up or drive junctions.
The table on the following pages summarizes the modules and their typical applications.
Determining Maximum Tangent Lengths
The modules at each end of the primary section are part of the overall tangent (see below). The maximum lengths of
tangents vary from configuration to configuration. The limiting factor is the length of the V-Belt required to power the
unit. The maximum length V-Belt is 450 long. When determining maximum tangent length, you must deduct the
V-Belt requirements for the primary section and for the A end and B end modules from 450. The remainder may
be divided and allocated to the overall tangent lengths to suit your system requirements. Remember to include the
module length in your overall tangent length calculation.
When an application has a configuration requirement exceeding this limitation, two or more V-Belt conveyors may be
used consecutively. Refer to tables 6A-6C in this section for additional information for determining maximum tangent
lengths.
Note: Some of the Primary Sections and Modules require additional tangent lengths when assembled together. Refer to Chart #6
at the end of this section for minimum intermediate tangent requirements and the module section for minimum intermediate
tangents required for the module.
Overall Tangent
Curves are rolled with a 12 tangent on each end. If your application requires less than the module length plus 12,
the rolled tangent will be cut off. Straight sections do not reference tangent lengths. A straight section is comprised of
the primary section and the "A" end and "B" end modules only. Refer to Chart 6C at the end of this section for
minimum and maximum overall straight lengths.
Section 1:

Page 10
December, 11
Locating the Drive

When designing your system, the power take-off or drive for your V-Belt conveyor is preferred at the entry of the
conveyor. The entry of the conveyor could be the A or B end. This will be determined by the function of the
primary section within the system.
There are times when the drive cannot be located at the entry end of the configured curve. When this happens, you
are able to power the curve at the exit. When driving at the exit, the high tension side of the V-Belt is now on the
bottom instead of the top, causing a decrease in the available product drive force. To compensate, this configuration
requires an increase in the initial belt tension. Avoid this configuration if possible. However, if this configuration must
be used the maximum load for the v-belt (normally 125 lbs.) should be reduced by 5 to 10%.
Application Requirement
PTO
PTO
PTO
LR to VB
VB to VB
BC to VB
Terminal End
Motorized End Drive
Junctions
Section 1:
Module
Typical Application
M11
Use when a speed change is required or when LR belt load is high.
M12
Use when an external chain guard is not desired.
M13
Use when either no speed change or a 10% speed change is required.

Speed change is achieved with varying pulley sizes versus chain and
sprockets.
M21
Use when a speed change is required.
M22
Use when an external chain guard is not desired.
M23
Use when the V-belt power needs to transfer from one side of the
conveyor to the other and when a speed change is required.
M24
Use when the V-belt power needs to transfer from one side of the
conveyor to the other and when a speed change is not required.
M31
Use when taking power from a belt conveyor and/or a speed change is
required.
M41
Use when the V-belt to be taken up is 6 or less or in addition to the

Quad take-up when more than 16 of v-belt has to be taken up.
M42
Use when an external motorized drive is required.
M43
Use when an internal motorized drive is required to eliminate external

chain guard.
M51
Use when a 30 junction is required. Take-up is included.
M52
Use when a 45 junction is required. Take-up is included.
M53
Use when an opposite mount and a 30 junction are required.
M54
Use when an opposite mount and a 45 junction are required.
M55
Use when a motorized drive and a 30 junction are required.
M56
Use when a motorized drive and a 45 junction are required.

Page 11
December, 11
Technical Data:
Conveyor Widths: V-Belt conveyors are available in standard nominal overall widths of 18, 24, 30, 36
and 42 unless otherwise noted. It is recommended the conveyor width be greater than the widest item to be
conveyed. Tight radius V-Belt conveyors are only available in standard widths of 18, 24 and 30
Roller Centers: V-Belt conveyors are available with the carrying rollers located at 3 centers on standard
conveyor and 2 centers on units with dense pack rollers.
Frame: Formed 10 x 10 Ga. steel side channel and 4-1/2 x 1-3/8 x 12 Ga. tie channel, the side channel is
punched to accept a 5/8 axle isolator insert for a 7/16 hex roller axle. Curves are rolled with a 12 tangent
on each end. The frames standard finish is Automotion gray. A galvanized finish and other powder coat
colors are available
Carrying Rollers: 1-7/8 Diameter 16 Ga. with 7/16 hex spring-loaded axles with ABEC-1 precision grease
packed bearings.
Tapered Carrying Rollers: 1-7/8 Diameter (small end) with 7/16 hex spring loaded axles with ABEC-1
precision grease packed bearings. Note: Tapered carrying rollers in standard curves are true tapered rollers.
Tapered carrying rollers in tight radius curves are non-true taper.
Axle Isolator Noise Reduction System: The carrying rollers are held in place by axle isolators. Axle
Isolator Noise Reduction System insulates the roller axle from the conveyor frame, thereby reducing noise
and mitigating wear and tear on conveyor side frame.
Tracking Snubber: (M11, M12, M13, and M31): 2-1/4 Dia. X 11 Ga. 1 round axle with cartridge bearings.
Belting: The V-Belt used in VB type conveyor is an industrial grade B section v-belt, providing added
performance in durability and drive force.
Pressure Sheaves: 3 Dia., 1/2 bore V-Groove sheave with ABEC-1 precision grease packed bearings.
(Used in all straights and tangents).
3.6 Dia., 1/2 bore single sided V-Groove sheave with ABEC-1 precision grease packed
bearings. (Used in all curves).
V-Belt Take-Up: There are two types of adjustable take-ups used on V-Belt Driven Conveyor. The first is a
terminal end take-up (Module M41, M51 and M52). The assembly includes a 6 PD idler providing 6 of
V-Belt take-up (3 of take-up travel). The second is the Quad Take-Up. This may be used in conjunction with
a terminal end and also when no terminal end take-up module is selected. The Quad Take-Up, located near
the terminal end, includes two 6 and two 4 PD idler providing 16 of V-Belt take-up (8 of take-up travel).
Drive: Drive power is achieved in V-Belt Driven Live Roller Conveyor by adding either a motorized drive
module or a slaved drive module. This manual groups the drive module options in four basic categories:
M1 Series V-Belt is slaved off of a Live Roller conveyor.

M2 Series V-Belt is slaved off of another V-Belt conveyor.
M3 Series V-Belt is slaved off of a Belt conveyor.
M4 Series V-Belt take-up or drive terminal ends.
M5 Series V-Belt take-up or drive junctions.
Section 1:

Page 12
December, 11
When configuring a V-Belt conveyor, select a drive module from one of the above series that fits your
application. For slave modules remember to include the effective belt pull requirements of the slaved VB
conveyor when sizing the drive for the upstream conveyor.
Conveyor Speed: V-Belt conveyors are available with standard fixed speeds of 70 through 180 feet per
minute in increments of 10 feet per minute, 200 through 320 feet per minute in increments of 20 feet per
minute, and 360 through 600 feet per minute in increments of 40 feet per minute. For any application
requiring slower or faster speeds consult Automotion. Refer to Chart No. 4 at the end of this section for slave
speed ratios for slave modules.
Note: 120, 240, and 480 fpm speeds are not available on module M42.
Standard Drive Configuration: The standard power unit consists of a right angle C-flange reducer,
230/460/3/60 TEFC C-face motor and V-grooved sheave. Module M42 utilizes a hollow bore direct drive
package. The M43 motorized drive module is available with either a chain drive or synchronous belt drive
package.
Section 1:

Page 13
December, 11
Horsepower Calculations: Formula

Due to varying factors affecting belt pull calculations, we have broken the V-Belt conveyor down into three categories:
straight sections (BP1), curve sections (BP2), and modules (BP3). It will be necessary to solve for these
independently and then total them to obtain accurate effective belt pulls.
Step 1: Determine Live Load (LL)
Using one of the following formulas, calculate for the rate carton and the
heaviest known carton. Use whichever one produces the highest lbs./ft.
Total Load on Conveyor (lbs) = Live Load (lbs/ft)
Product Weight (lbs/carton) x product rate (cartons/minute) = Live Load (lbs/ft)
Conveyor Speed (ft/minute)
Product Weight (lbs) = Live Load (lbs/ft)

Product Length (ft)
Consider that gapped product will reduce the actual live loading.
Key
LL
= Live Load (lbs./ft.)
Length
= Conveyor Length (ft.)
SC
= Speed Constant (lbs.
BP1
= Belt Pull for Straights (lbs.)
BP2
= Belt Pull for Curves (lbs.
BP3
= Belt Pull for Modules
WF
= Width Factor
FC
= Figure Constant (lbs.)
EBP
= Effective Belt for

Motorized Drives (lbs.)
EBPS
= Effective Belt Pull for

Slaved Drives (lbs.)
Step 2: Determine Primary Section and Intermediate Lengths

a) For Straights (Figures 408 & 409): For straight v-belt conveyors determine the primary section length by
subtracting the length of the "A" end and "B" end modules from the overall straight length.
Required when calculating BP1 for straight sections (Figures 408 & 409)
Length (in.)
Overall Straight
Minus "A" End Module (see chart A in worksheet)
Minus "B" End Module (see chart A in worksheet)
Primary Section Length =
b) For Curves (Figures 401-407): For curved v-belt conveyors determine the length of the straight part
(tangents) of the curve by subtracting the length of the "A" end module from the overall tangent at the "A" end.
Next subtract the length of the "B" end module from the overall tangent at the "B" end of the conveyor. Add the
two together to obtain the total straight (int. tangents) section of the curve. For figures 405 and 407 (180 degree
and tight radius 180 degree curves), remember to add the intermediate "C" tangent if there is one.
Required when calculating BP1 for intermediate tangents in curve sections (Figures 401 thru 407)
End
A
B
Section 1:
Overall Tangent Length (in.) - Module Length (in.) (see Chart A)

-

= Int. Tangent Length (in.)

=
=
Int. "C" Tangent (if applicable)
Total of All Tangents in Curve
Page 14
December, 11
Step 3: Calculate Belt Pull

a). For Straights (Figures 408 & 409): Total Belt Pull = BP1 + BP3.
1). Multiply the live load by 0.06 and then add the speed constant from Chart No. 1 at the end of this
section. Next, multiply by the primary section length in inches calculated in step 2A, and then divide by 12.
BP1 = [(Live Load x 0.06) + Speed Constant] x (Primary Section or Total Intermediate Length in inches) 12
2). Determine the belt pull for the modules. Multiply the total number of modules by 5 lbs.
BP3 = Total number of modules x 5 lbs.
b) For Curves (Figures 401-407): Total Belt Pull = BP1 + BP2 + BP3.
1). Determine the belt pull (BP1) for the total intermediate tangent the same way you would for a straight
figure as described above.
2). Determine the belt pull (BP2) for the curve portion. Multiply the live load by 0.133 and then add the
speed constant from Chart 1. Next, multiply by the width factor, and then by the figure constant.
BP2 = [(Live Load x 0.133) + Speed Constant] x (Width Factor) x (Figure Constant)
Width factor
NW
18
24
30
36
42
Constant
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
Figure Constant
Figure No.
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
Constant
2
3
4
6
12
6.6
13.2
3). Determine the belt pull for the modules. Multiply the total number of modules by 5 lbs.
BP3 = Total number of modules x 5 lbs.
Step 4: Calculate Effective Belt Pull
a). For Straights (Figures 408 & 409): Add BP1 + BP3 from step 3A, then multiply by 1.25.
Effective Belt Pull for Straight Figures = (BP1 + BP3) x 1.25
b). For Curves (Figures 401-407): Add BP1 & BP2 & BP3 from step 3B, then multiply by 1.25.
Effective Belt Pull for Curve Figures = (BP1 + BP2 + BP3) x 1.25
Step 5: Effective belt Pull Versus Strength of Provided Belts
Verify that the Effective Belt Pull (lbs) you just calculated does not exceed 125 lbs. for drive at entry (110 lbs. for
drive at exit)
Section 1:

Page 15
December, 11
Step 6: Is this Conveyor Motorized or Will it Be Slaved?

Motorized no slaved conveyors: Using the conveyor speed and EBP, select the appropriate HP for your
Drive from Chart nos. 3A, 3B or 3C depending on the module selected. Charts are located at the end of this
section.
Slaved: Using Chart no. 4 at the end of this section, locate the Driver/Driven values for the Module and Slave
Speed Ratio required. Solve for EBPS (Effective Belt Pull for Slaved Drives) by plugging the Drive/Driven
values into the formula below:
EBPS = [EBP x (Driver / Driven)]
If the slaved v-belt conveyor is to be powered by another v-belt conveyor, add EBPS to the EBP of the
v-belt conveyor that will provide power to the slave. Then using the conveyor speed and the total EBP (EBP
+ EBPS), select the appropriate HP for your Drive from Chart nos. 3A, 3B or 3C depending on the module
selected. Charts are located at the end of this section.
If the slaved v-belt is to be Slaved from a live roller or belt conveyor, add EBPS to the effective belt pull
calculated for the live roller or belt conveyor to obtain total effective belt pull for that conveyor.
Primary Sections 401, 402, 403, 404 and 40
Primary Sections 405 and 407

Intermed.
Tangent
"C"
"
En A"
d
Intermed.
Tangent
"A"
Intermed.
Tangent
"B"
Module
"B"
OVERALL
TANGENT
"
" B nd
E
e
ul
od "
M "B
Module
"A"
"B"
End
M
o
"A dul
" e
"A"
End
.
ed
rm nt
te e
In ang B"
T "
O
TA VE
N RA
G L
EN L
T
In
t
Ta erm
n e
"A gen d.
" t
Primary
Section
Primary Sections 408 and 409
Module
"A"
Section 1:
"A"
End

Primary
Section
"B"
End
Module
"B"
Page 16
December, 11
Horsepower Calculations: Worksheet

Fill in the shaded boxes on this form to capture the data you will need to calculate HP requirements for your motorized and
slaved V-Belt conveyors.
Conveyor No.
Module A
Figure No.
M__A
Roller Centers
Module B
M11
M12
M13
M21
M22
M23
12
12
12
12
12
M__B
In.
Conveyor Speed
12
12
12
24
Required when calculating BP1 for intermediate tangents in curve

sections (Figures 401 thru 407)
End
Overall Tangent
Length (in.)
M52
M53
M54
M55
M56
Required when calculating BP1 for

straight sections (Figures 408 & 409)
Int. Tangent
Length (in.)
Length
=
=
Overall Straight
Minus "A" End Module
Int. "C" Tangent (if applicable) =
Minus "B" End Module
Total of All Tangents in Curve =
Lbs./ Ft.
M51
Length (in.)
- Module
(see Chart A above)
A
B
In.
Live Load/Foot
Fpm
Chart A Module Length (in.)

M24 M31 M41 M42 M43
Conveyor Width
(in.)
(see Chart A above)

(see Chart A above)
Primary Section Length =
Total
Straight
Total
Straight
a). For Straights (Figures 408 & 409): Total Belt Pull = BP1 + BP3.
b). For Curves (Figures 401-407): Total Belt Pull = BP1 + BP2 + BP3.
BP1=[
(
Live Load Lbs/Ft
x 0.06) +
Speed Constant Lbs.
]x[(
BP2=[
(
Live Load Lbs/Ft
x .133) +
Speed Constant Lbs.
]x(
BP3=
No. of Modules
x 5 Lbs.
a). For Straights (Figures 408 & 409): EBP Straights = (

b). For Curves (Figures 401 - 407): EBP Curves = (
) 12 ]
Total Straight Length in.
)x(
Width Factor in.
BP1 + BP3 lbs.
Figure Constant Lbs.
) x 1.25
BP1 + BP2 + BP3 lbs.
) x 1.25
For motorized drives with no slaves: Use speed and EBP, to select HP from chart nos. 3A, 3B or 3C depending on module.
For slaved drives EBPS =
EBP
lbs.
x [(
Driver / Driven
)] Refer to chart no. 4 for Driver/Driven values.
If slaved by v-belt conveyor: Use speed and EBP + EBPS, to select HP from chart nos. 3A, 3B or 3C depending on module.
If slaved by live roller or belt conveyor: Add EBPS to the EBP calculated for the live roller or belt conveyor.
Width Factor
Figure Constant
EBP (Motor)
Slaved Conveyor No.
Horsepower
Reducer Ratio
Section 1:

Lbs.
EBPS (Slave)
Driver/Driven
Lbs.
Page 17
December, 11
Horsepower Calculations: Formula Charts

Chart No. 1: Speed Constant (lbs.) for use in HP Calculation Formula
Conveyor
Speed
(FPM)
80
81-120
121-160
161-180
181-200
201-240
241-280
281-320
321-360
361-400
401-440
441-480
481-520
521-560
Section 1:
Straights & Tangents

3 r.c.
0.56
0.84
1.13
1.27
1.41
1.69
1.97
2.25
2.53
2.81
3.10
3.38
3.66
3.94
2 r.c.
0.84
1.26
1.67
1.88
2.09
2.51
2.93
3.35
3.77
4.18
4.60
5.02
5.44
5.86

Skewed Straights
and Tangents
3 r.c.
2 r.c.
0.84
1.38
1.26
2.08
1.67
2.77
1.80
3.11
2.09
3.46
2.51
4.15
2.93
4.84
3.35
5.54
3.77
6.23
4.18
6.92
4.60
7.61
5.02
8.31
5.44
9.00
5.86
9.69
Curves
3 r.c.
0.93
1.40
1.86
2.09
2.33
2.79
3.26
3.72
4.19
4.65
5.12
5.58
6.05
6.51
2 r.c.
1.33
2.00
2.67
3.00
3.33
4.00
4.67
5.33
6.00
6.67
7.33
8.00
8.67
9.33
Page 18
December, 11
Chart No. 2: Length of Power Curve Measured at Centerline

Fig No.
Primary Section
18
24
30
36
42
No. 401
30 Curve
1.70
1.83
1.96
2.09
2.23
No. 402
45 Curve
2.55
2.75
2.95
3.14
3.34
No. 403
60 Curve
3.40
3.66
3.93
4.18
4.45
No. 404
90 Curve
5.11
5.50
5.89
6.28
N/A
No. 405
180 Curve
10.21
11.00
11.78
12.57
N/A
No. 406
90 Tight Radius
2.95
3.34
3.73
N/A
N/A
No. 407
180 Tight Radius
5.89
6.68
7.46
N/A
N/A
No. 408
Straight Bed
Primary
length
Primary
length
Primary
length
Primary
length
Primary
length
No. 409
Skew Bed
Primary
length
Primary
length
Primary
length
Primary
length
Primary
length
Mod.
No.
Module
M11
VB to LR External PTO
M12
VB to LR Internal PTO
M13
VB to LR Internal PTO 1:1
M21
VB to VB External PTO
M22
VB to VB Internal PTO
M23
VB to VB PTO Cross Over
M24
VB to VB PTO Cross Over 1:1
.5
M31
VB to BC External PTO
M41
VB Terminal End
M42
VB External Drive
M43
VB Internal Drive
M51
30 Junction
2.12
2.55
2.98
3.42
3.85
M52
45 Junction
1.65
1.90
2.15
2.40
2.65
M53
30 Junction with Cross Over
3.12
3.55
3.98
4.42
4.85
M54
45 Junction with Cross Over
2.65
2.90
3.15
3.40
3.65
M55
30 Junction - External Drive
2.12
2.55
2.98
3.42
3.85
M56
45 Junction - External Drive
1.65
1.90
2.15
2.40
2.65
Section 1:

.85
Page 19
December, 11
Chart No. 3A: Drive HP Selection (for Modules M43 with a Chain Drive)
Automotion recommends using the smallest drive while still meeting your drive requirements
Speed
(fpm)
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
360
400
440
480
520
560
600
Section 1:
Effective Belt Pull Numbers

EBP or EBP + EBPS for Conveyors with Slaves
HP
Reducer
Reducer Ratio
Efficiency
0.75
1
1.5
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
112.72
102.47
93.93
86.71
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
115.61
109.36
102.07
95.69

125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
116.46
105.87
97.05
89.58
83.18
77.64
30
30
30
25
25
20
20
20
15
15
15
10
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
5
5
5
5
5
5
79.22%
79.22%
79.22%
83.82%
83.82%
84.65%
84.65%
84.65%
87.98%
87.98%
87.98%
91.09%
91.09%
91.09%
91.09%
91.09%
92.79%
92.79%
92.79%
92.79%
94.11%
94.11%
94.11%
94.11%
94.11%
94.11%
Page 20
December, 11
Chart No. 3B: Drive HP Selection (for Modules M43 with a Synchronous Drive Belt)

HP
Speed
Reducer
Reducer
(fpm)
Ratio
Efficiency
0.75
1
1.5
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
360
400
440
480
520
560
600
Section 1:
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
112.72
102.47
93.93
86.71
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
115.61
107.35
100.19
95.69

125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
114.83
105.87
97.05
89.58
83.18
77.64
30
30
20
25
20
20
20
20
20
15
15
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
5
5
5
5
5
79.22%
79.22%
84.65%
83.82%
84.65%
84.65%
84.65%
84.65%
84.65%
87.98%
87.98%
91.09%
91.09%
91.09%
91.09%
91.09%
91.09%
91.09%
92.79%
92.79%
92.79%
94.11%
94.11%
94.11%
94.11%
94.11%
Page 21
December, 11
Chart No. 3C: Drive HP Selection (for Modules M42, M55 and M56)

HP
Speed
Reducer
Reducer
(fpm)
Ratio
Efficiency
0.75
1
1.5
70
80
90
100
110
130
140
150
160
170
180
200
220
260
280
300
320
360
400
440
520
560
600
Section 1:
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
119.23
118.27
106.44
96.77
84.56
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
112.75
104.70
97.72
91.61

125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
114.02
103.66
88.83
82.48
76.98
40
40
30
30
30
20
20
20
20
20
15
15
15
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
5
5
5
70.03%
70.03%
76.01%
76.01%
76.01%
81.90%
81.90%
81.90%
81.90%
81.90%
86.01%
86.01%
86.01%
88.83%
88.83%
88.83%
88.83%
92.14%
92.14%
92.14%
93.31%
93.31%
93.31%
Page 22
December, 11
Chart No. 4: Slave Speed Ratio / Number of Drive / Driven Sprocket Teeth (For Calculating EBPS
Requirements)
Driver/Driven
Slave Speed Ratio
M11
M12
M13
M21
M22
M23
M31
+50%
+40%
1:1.5
1:1.4
21/14
21/15
21/14
21/15
N/A
N/A
21/14
21/15
21/14
21/15
21/14
21/15
N/A
N/A
+30%
+20%
1:1.3
1:1.2
21/16
23/19
21/16
23/19
N/A
N/A
21/16
23/19
21/16
23/19
21/16
23/19
N/A
23/19
+15%
+10%
1:1.15
1:1.1
22/19
21/19
22/19
21/19
N/A
21/19
22/19
21/19
22/19
21/19
22/19
21/19
22/19
21/19
0%
1:1
21/21
21/21
21/21
21/21
21/21
21/21
21/21
-10%
-15%
1.1:1
1.15:1
21/23
21/25
21/23
21/25
N/A
N/A
21/23
21/25
21/23
21/25
21/23
21/25
21/23
21/25
-20%
-30%
1.2:1
1.3:1
20/25
17/24
20/25
17/24
N/A
N/A
20/25
17/24
20/25
17/24
20/25
17/24
20/25
N/A
-40%
-50%
1.4:1
1.5:1
17/28
15/30*
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
17/28
15/30
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Chart No. 3C: Drive HP Selection (for Modules M42, M55 and M56)
Chart No. 5: Shaft Diameter Requirements

Live Roller Conveyor
Max. EBP lbs.
Shaft Diameter
Up to 375
Up to 680
1.1875 (1 3/16)
1.4375 (1 7/16)
Belt Conveyor
Max EBP lbs.
Shaft Diameter
Up to 375
Up to 600
Up to 900
1.1875 (1 3/16)
1.4375 (1 7/16)
1.6875 (1 11/16)
Note: Verify that the shaft diameter required is available in your selected Module. Reference VB-Section 3.
Note: Remember to add the appropriate belt length requirements for Live Roller and Belt Conveyor modules:
M1 Series (LR) requires 26 of 8 wide drive belt.
M3 Series (BC) requires 28 of carrying belt.
Section 1:

Page 23
December, 11
Chart No. 6A: Min / Max Tangent Lengths for Standard and Tight Radius Curves
401
30
Curve
3
2
Minimum
Intermediate
"A" END
6
12
402
45
Curve
3
2
0
12
403
60
Curve
3
2
404
90
Curve
405
Figure Primary Roller

No.
Section Center
Minimum
Intermediate
"B" END
6
12
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
Intermediate "C" Intermediate "C" Intermediate "A"
END
END
+ "B" + "C"
N/A
N/A
120
0
12
N/A
N/A
120
0
12
0
12
N/A
N/A
108
3
2
0
12
0
12
N/A
N/A
84
180
Curve
3
2
0
12
0
12
21
22
24
406
90 TR
Curve
3
2
0
12
0
12
N/A
N/A
108
407
180
Curve
21
84
Chart No. 6B: Tangent Deductions for Junction Modules Used on Standard and Tight Radius Curves
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
42
M51 & M55 Deduction

-6
-18
-24
-36
-48
M52 & M56 Deduction

0
-6
-12
-18
-24
Chart No. 6C: Min / Max Tangent Lengths for Straight V-Belt Conveyors
Figure No.
Primary Section
408
Straight Bed
409
Skew Bed
Roller Centers
3
2
3
2
Minimum Primary
Section Length
Maximum Primary
Section Length
24
120
48
120
Chart No. 6D: Tangent Deductions for Junction Modules Used on Standard V-Belt Conveyors
Nominal Width
18
24
30
36
42
Section 1:
M51 & M55 Deduction

-6
-18
-24
-36
-48

M52 & M56 Deduction

0
-6
-12
-18
-24
Page 24
December, 11
Chart No. 7: Power Curve Roller Center for Standard Curve Assemblies
Inside Radius
Centerline
Outside Radius
Centerline
Inside Radius
Outside Radius
Centers
Radius Centers
Centers
Radius Centers
NOAW
Centers (2
Centers (2
(Standard 3
(Standard 3
(Standard 3
(2 Roller
Roller Centers)
Roller Centers)
Roller Centers) Roller Centers) Roller Centers)
Centers)
18
2-1/2
3-1/2
2-7/16
2-7/8
24
2-1/2
3-1/4
2-19/32
3-3/16
30
2-1/2
3-15/32
4-7/16
2-13/16
3-5/8
36
2-1/2
3-23/32
4-15/16
42
2-1/2
3-15/16
5-3/8
3-3/16
4-3/8
Chart No. 8: Power Curve Roller Center for Tight Radius Curve Assemblies
NOAW
Inside Radius Centers
Centerline Radius Centers
Outside Radius Centers
18
2-3/8
3-3/8
4-3/8
24
2-3/8
3-27/32
5-5/16
30
2-3/8
4-11/32
6-5/16
Section 1:

Page 25
December, 11
V-Belt Conveyor Dimensions:
30 Curve
Chart No. 9a: Width Specific Dimensions (Figure 401)
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
3-5 7/8
11 1/4
3-10 5/8
24
25
21 1/2
3-7 3/8
11 5/8
4-1 5/8
30
31
27 1/2
3-8 7/8
1-0
4-4 5/8
36
37
33 1/2
3-10 3/8
1-0 7/16
4-7 5/8
42
43
39 1/2
3-11 7/8
1-0 13/16
4-10 5/8
45 Curve
Chart No. 9b: Width Specific Dimensions (Figure 402)
Section 1:
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
4-0 1/16
1-7 15/16
4-6 3/4
24
25
21 1/2
4-2 3/16
1-8 13/16
4-11
30
31
27 1/2
4-4 5/16
1-9 11/16
5-3 1/4
36
37
33 1/2
4-6 7/16
1-10 9/16
5-7 1/2
42
43
39 1/2
4-8 9/16
1-11 7/16
5-11 3/4

Page 26
December, 11
60 Curve
Chart No. 9c: Width Specific Dimensions (Figure 403)
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
4-3 3/4
2-5 7/8
5-0
24
25
21 1/2
4-6 3/8
2-7 3/8
5-5 3/16
30
31
27 1/2
4-9
2-8 7/8
5-10 3/8
36
37
33 1/2
4-11 9/16
2-10 3/8
6-3 9/16
42
43
39 1/2
5-2 3/16
2-11 7/8
6-8 13/16
90 Curve
Chart No. 9d: Width Specific Dimensions (Figure 404)
Section 1:
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
4-3
4-3
5-0 1/2
24
25
21 1/2
4-6
4-6
5-6 1/2
30
31
27 1/2
4-9
4-9
6-0 1/2
36
37
33 1/2
5-0
5-0
6-6 1/2

Page 27
December, 11
180 Curve
Chart No. 9e: Width Specific Dimensions (Figure 405)
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
6-6
8-1
5-0 1/2
24
25
21 1/2
7-0
9-1
5-6 1/2
30
31
27 1/2
7-6
10-1
6-0 1/2
36
37
33 1/2
8-0
11-1
6-6 1/2
90 Curve
Tight Radius
Chart No. 9f: Width Specific Dimensions (Figure 406)
Section 1:
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
2-10 1/2
2-10 1/2
3-8
24
25
21 1/2
3-1 1/2
3-1 1/2
4-2
30
31
27 1/2
3-4 1/2
3-4 1/2
4-8

Page 28
December, 11
180 Curve
Tight Radius
Chart No. 9g: Width Specific Dimensions (Figure 407)
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
3-9
5-4
3-8
24
25
21 1/2
4-3
6-4
4-2
30
31
27 1/2
4-9
7-4
4-8
Chart No. 9h: Width Specific Dimensions (Figure 408 and 409)
Section 1:
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
Fig. 408
Straight Bed
Fig. 409
Skew Bed
18
19
15 1/2
4-0 min.
6-0 min.
24
25
21 1/2
4-0 min.
6-0 min.
30
31
27 1/2
4-0 min.
6-0 min.
36
37
33 1/2
4-0 min.
6-0 min.
42
43
39 1/2
4-0 min.
6-0 min.

Page 29
December, 11
M51
M55
Chart No. 9i: Width Specific Dimensions (Modules M51 and M55)
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
2-1 7/8
2-2 7/8
3-2 7/8
2-10
24
25
21 1/2
2-7 1/16
3-1 1/4
4-1 1/4
3-10
30
31
27 1/2
3-0 1/4
3-11 5/8
4-11 5/8
4-10
36
37
33 1/2
3-5 7/16
4-10
5-10
5-10
42
43
39 1/2
3-10 5/8
5-8 3/8
6-8 3/8
6-10
M52
M56
Chart No. 9j: Width Specific Dimensions (Modules M52 and M56)
Section 1:
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
1-8
1-3 1/2
2-3 1/2
2-0
24
25
21 1/2
1-11
1-9 1/2
2-9 1/2
2-8 1/2
30
31
27 1/2
2-2
2-3 1/2
3-3 1/2
3-5
36
37
33 1/2
2-5
2-9 1/2
3-9 1/2
4-1 1/2
42
43
39 1/2
2-8
3-3 1/2
4-3 1/2
4-9 15/16

Page 30
December, 11
M53
Chart No. 9k: Width Specific Dimensions (Modules M53)
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
3-1 7/8
2-2 7/8
4-2 7/8
2-10
24
25
21 1/2
3-7 1/16
3-1 1/4
5-1 1/4
3-10
30
31
27 1/2
4-0 1/4
3-11 5/8
5-11 5/8
4-10
36
37
33 1/2
4-5 7/16
4-10
6-10
5-10
42
43
39 1/2
4-10 5/8
5-8 3/8
7-8 3/8
6-10
M54
Chart No. 9l: Width Specific Dimensions (Modules M52 and M56)
Section 1:
Nominal Width
O.A.W.
BR
18
19
15 1/2
2-8
1-3 1/2
3-3 1/2
2-0
24
25
21 1/2
2-11
1-9 1/2
3-9 1/2
2-8 1/2
30
31
27 1/2
3-2
2-3 1/2
4-3 1/2
3-5
36
37
33 1/2
3-5
2-9 1/2
4-9 1/2
4-1 1/2
42
43
39 1/2
3-8
3-3 1/2
5-3 1/2
4-9 15/16

Page 31
December, 11
Calculation of V-Belt Conveyor Weights: (Lbs.)

For Primary Sections 401, 402, 403, 404 and 406
Weight = Module A + Primary Section + Module B + [ ( Intermediate Tangent A + Intermediate Tangent B ) *
intermediate tangent Lbs/ft ]
"B"
End
e
ul
od "
M "B
M
o
" A dul
" e
"A"
End
.
ed
r m nt
te e
In ang B"
T "
In
Ta term
n e
"A gen d.
" t
Primary
Section
For Primary Sections 405 and 407

Weight = Module A + Primary Section + Module B + [ ( Intermediate Tangent A + Intermediate Tangent B +
Intermediate Tangent C ) * intermediate tangent Lbs/ft ]
Module
"B"
Module
"A"
Intermed.
Tangent
"B"
Intermed.
Tangent
"A"
"
"B nd
E
"
E n A"
d
Intermed.
Tangent
"C"
For Primary Sections 408 and 409

Weight = Primary Section + ( Module A + Module B ) * intermediate tangent Lbs/ft ]
Module
"A"
Section 1:
"A"
End

Primary
Section
"B"
End
Module
"B"
Page 32
December, 11
Components Weight
Roller
Centers
Roller
Centers
Roller
Centers
Roller
Centers
Section 1:
Nominal
Width
18
24
30
36
42
18
24
30
36
42
Nominal
Width
18
24
30
36
42
18
24
30
36
42
401
99
122
151
187
230
103
129
161
202
253
Primary Section (lbs.)

403
404
405
151
206
409
189
260
516
237
330
656
305
434
863
390
N/A
N/A
174
219
433
218
280
555
274
362
757
357
482
958
465
N/A
N/A
402
126
158
196
251
321
132
167
212
274
354
406
129
161
202
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
407
176
233
306
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Primary Sections 408, 409 and

Intermediate Tangent Lengths (lbs./ft.)
30
34
38
43
47
32
38
44
51
56
Nominal
Width
18
24
30
36
42
18
24
30
36
42
M11
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
168
195
221
249
277
Nominal
Width
18
24
30
36
42
18
24
30
36
42
M41
32
38
43
48
53
41
48
55
62
69
M12
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
175
210
235
269
302
M42
81
87
92
97
102
90
96
101
106
111

M13
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
129
151
172
195
218
M43
168
187
206
227
245
175
195
219
243
266
Module (lbs.)
M21
M22
96
117
106
133
117
149
129
164
141
179
108
124
122
143
137
163
152
183
167
203
Module (lbs.)
M51
M52
M53
73
57
133
104
79
168
131
101
208
169
123
247
207
145
286
80
58
141
118
86
181
154
114
231
198
142
282
242
170
333
M23
117
133
149
164
179
124
143
163
183
203
M54
108
140
173
200
231
112
153
193
226
266
M24
75
88
100
112
123
87
98
109
120
131
M31
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
149
168
187
206
225
M55
122
153
180
218
256
129
166
200
242
284
M56
144
179
215
253
288
143
185
232
279
325
Page 33
December, 11

Figures
Section 2:
(VB) V-Belt Driven Live Roller:

Figures
Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
Figure Listing.............................................................................................................................. 3
How to configure a V-Belt figure ............................................................................................... 4
Practical Examples of V-Belt Conveyor Figures and Modules:.............................................. 5
Fig 401: 30 Degree Curve Bed (True Taper) ............................................................................ 8
Fig 402: 45 Degree Curve Bed (True Taper) ............................................................................ 9
Fig 403: 60 Degree Curve Bed (True Taper) .......................................................................... 10
Fig 404: 90 Degree Curve Bed (True Taper) .......................................................................... 11
Fig 405: 180 Degree Curve Bed (True Taper) ........................................................................ 12
Fig 406: 90 Degree Curve Bed (Tight Radius) ....................................................................... 13
Fig 407: 180 Degree Curve Bed (Tight Radius) ..................................................................... 14
Fig 408: Straight Bed............................................................................................................... 15
Fig 409: Skew Bed ................................................................................................................... 16
Section 2:

Figures
Page 2
December, 11
Figure Listing:
401
402
STANDARD CURVES
"A"
"B"
"A"
30
"B"
45
403
404
"B"
"A"
405
"A"
"B"
"A"
TIGHT RADIUS CURVES
60
90
406
"B"
"A"
90
STRAIGHT BEDS
"B"
180
408
Section 2:
180
407
"A"
"A"
"B"
409
"B"

Figures
"A"
"B"
Page 3
December, 11
How to configure a V-Belt figure:

The primary section of the figure has an A end and a B end (see illustrations below). Product flow is not a
factor, so entry and exit terminal end and right or left hand designations are not relevant.
To configure a V-belt Figure:
1) Select the figure you require from the V-Belt Figure section based upon the function of the primary section
of the assembly.
2) Determine the module series to be used at the A end of the V-Belt figure, such as VB Drives and Terminal
Ends, VB to LR or VB to BC. Detailed information for each module is available in VB-Section 3.
3) Based on your application and drive requirements, select a module from within that series.
4) All figures must be configured with only one drive or slave module in a Ship Level Assembly (SLA).
5) Fill in the blanks in the How to Specify section of the Figure page to correspond with your conveyor
specifications.
6) When required, provide Tangent A and Tangent B in the space provided. Use the min/max tangent data
from the Dimension Charts (no. 6) in VB-Section 1: Application and Technical Data, and from each of the
detailed module sheets in VB-Section 3 Components and Accessories as a guide for determining the
allowable overall tangent lengths. The Intermediate Tangent length will be determined automatically and,
therefore, is not a pick.
Note: In some instances, the module data you reference will not be part of the Ship Level Assembly (SLA).
However, it is still necessary to reference the information for v-belt length calculation purposes. If the module is
part of the Ship Level Assembly, choose Y in the Part of SLA column. If the module is not part of the Ship Level
Assembly choose N. When N is chosen only record the portion of the tangent included in the Ship Level
Assembly (SLA). Refer to module M24A in the following "S" curve example (How to Specify P102) for an example
of modules not part of the Ship Level Assemble (SLA).
In
Ta term
n e
" A gen d .
" t
"
e
ul
od "
M "B
M
o
"A dul
" e
A
t"
en
ng
"B"
End
Ta
"A"
End
.
ed
rm nt
te e
In ang B"
T "
Ta
ng
en
t"
A
"
Primary
Section
Orientation
View
Overall Straight Length
Module
"A"
"A"
End
Primary
Section
"B"
End
Module
"B"
Orientation
View
Section 2:

Figures
Page 4
December, 11
Practical Examples of V-Belt Conveyor Figures and Modules:

30"
"A"
LR
M13A
404
18"
"B"
M41B
BC
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
404
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
24
18
24
30
36
42
3
2
3
FPM
160
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
Tangent
SLA Length
Module
M 1 3 A
Y
30
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M 4 1 B
Y
18
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
LR
BC
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None
HP
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed
Ratio
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
See
Chart
5
N/A
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Sprocket/
Sheave Pulley
Hub
Face
Std.
Std.
QD
Std.
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
120"
BC
"A"
M31A
"B"
408
LR
M41B
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
408
Section 2:
Nom.
Width
24
18
24
30
36
42
FPM
160
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
Drop
SLA
Kit
Module
M 3 1 A
Y
BC
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M 4 1 B
Y
LR
Y
BC
N
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None

Figures
Bed
Length
120
See
Chart 6
HP
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed
Ratio
1.2:1
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
23
See
Chart
5
N/A
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Sprocket/
Sheave
Hub
Std.
Std.
QD
Pulley
Face
Std.
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
Page 5
December, 11
30"
M53A
401
LR
48"
M11B
"A" "B"
LR
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
401
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
24
18
24
30
36
42
3
2
3
FPM
300
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
Tangent
Module
SLA Length
M 5 3 A
Y
30
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M 1 1 B
Y
48
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
LR
LR
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None
Slave
Speed
Ratio
HP
See
Chart
3
1:1
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
19
See
Chart
5
N/A
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
See
Chart
5
N/A
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Sprocket/
Sheave Pulley
Face
Hub
QD
Std.
QD
MC
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
LR
24"
30"
M55B
403
M41A
"A"
"B"
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
403
Section 2:
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
24
18
24
30
36
42
3
2
3
FPM
220
See
Chart
3
Part
Tangent
Of
Module
SLA Length
M 4 1 A
Y
24
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M 5 5 B
Y
30
Y
See
N
Chart 6

Figures
Drop
Kit
LR
None
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None
HP
1
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed
Ratio
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Sprocket/
Sheave Pulley
Hub
Face
Std.
Std.
QD
Std.
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
Page 6
December, 11
M41B
P102
403
LR
"B"
"A"
M24A
M42B
12"
24"
"A"
"B"
LR
403
12"
P101
How to Specify: P101

Qty Fig.
403
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
24
18
24
30
36
42
3
2
3
FPM
160
See
Chart
3
Part
Of Tangent
SLA Length
Module
M 2 4 A
N
0
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M 4 2 B
Y
12
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
VB
LR
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None
HP
1
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed Shaft
Ratio Dia.
Drive
Type Roller
N/A
See
See
N/A
Chart Chart Chain
4
5
Belt
(Slave
(M43
Mods.
ONLY)
Only)
Std.
Std.
HS
Sprocket/
Sheave Pulley
Hub
Face
Std.
Std.
QD
Std.
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
How to Specify: P102

Qty Fig.
403
Section 2:
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
24
18
24
30
36
42
3
2
3
FPM
160
See
Chart
3
Part
Of Tangent
SLA Length
Module
M 2 4 A
Y
24
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M 4 1 B
Y
12
Y
See
N
Chart 6

Figures
Drop
Kit
BC
LR
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None
HP
See
Chart
3
Sprocket/
Slave
Sheave
Speed Shaft Drive
Hub
Ratio Dia. Type Roller
Pulley
Face
1.2:1
23
N/A
See
See
N/A
Chart Chart Chain
4
5
Belt
(Slave
(M43
Mods.
ONLY)
Only)
Std.
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
Std.
Std.
HS
Std.
Std.
QD
Page 7
December, 11
Fig 401: 30 Degree Curve Bed (True Taper)

Components:
Bed Section: 10 deep x 1 3/4
flange x 10 gauge galvanized
isolators* included.
Inside
radius equals 29 7/8.
Drive Belt: B section v-belt
Rollers: 1 7/8 dia. (small end)
tapered carrying rollers with
7/16 hex axles.
Notes:
1. Each Ship Level Assembly (SLA) can have only one drive or slave module.
2. Axle isolators on inside radius inverted by design.
3. Tangent lengths longer than 60 require an additional support.
4. All carrying rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
Nom. Roller
Width Center FPM
401
18
24
30
36
42
Section 2:
2
3
See
Chart
3
Part
Of Tangent
SLA Length
Module
_
_
A
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
B
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
HP
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed
Ratio
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
See
Chart
5
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Sprocket/
Sheave
Hub
Std.
QD
Pulley
Face
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None
* Charts located in Section 1: (VB) V-Belt Driven Live Roller: Application and Technical Data.

Figures
Page 8
December, 11

Components:
Inside
7/16 hex axles.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
FPM
402
Section 2:
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
SLA
Tangent
Length
Module
M _ _ A
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M _ _ B
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
HP
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed
Ratio
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
See
Chart
5
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Sprocket/
Sheave Pulley
Hub
Face
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None

Figures
Page 9
December, 11

Components:
Inside
7/16 hex axles.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
FPM
403
Section 2:
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
SLA
Tangent
Length
Module
M _ _ A
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M _ _ B
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
HP
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed
Ratio
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
See
Chart
5
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Sprocket/
Sheave Pulley
Hub
Face
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None

Figures
Page 10
December, 11

Components:
Inside
7/16 hex axles.
"
In
Ta term
n e
"A gen d.
" t
e
ul
od "
M "B
M
o
"A dul
" e
"B"
End
t"
en
ng
Ta
"A"
End
.
ed
rm nt
te e
In ang B"
T "
Ta
ng
en
t"
A
"
Primary
Section
Orientation
View
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
2
3
FPM
404
Section 2:
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
SLA
Tangent
Length
Module
M _ _ A
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M _ _ B
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
HP
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed
Ratio
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
See
Chart
5
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Sprocket/
Sheave Pulley
Face
Hub
Std.
QD
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None

Figures
Page 11
December, 11

Components:
Inside
7/16 hex axles.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Nom.
Qty Fig. Width
Roller
Center
FPM
405
18
24
30
36
Section 2:
2
3
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
SLA
Tangent
Length
Module
M _ _ A
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
_ _ B
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
Interm.
Tangent
Length
C
HP
See
Chart
6
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed Shaft
Ratio Dia.
Drive
Type
See
See
N/A
Chart Chart Chain
4
5
Belt
(Slave
(M43
Mods.
ONLY)
Only)
Sprocket/
Sheave
Hub
Std.
QD
Pulley
Face
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None

Figures
Page 12
December, 11
Fig 406: 90 Degree Curve Bed (Tight Radius)

Components:
Inside
7/16 hex axles.
"
In
Ta term
n e
"A gen d.
" t
e
ul
od "
M "B
M
o
"A dul
" e
"B"
End
t"
en
ng
Ta
"A"
End
.
ed
rm nt
te e
In ang B"
T "
Ta
ng
en
t"
A
"
Primary
Section
Orientation
View
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
Nom.
Width
FPM
18
24
30
See
Chart
3
406
Section 2:
Part
Of
SLA
Tangent
Length
Module
M _ _ A
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
_ B
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
HP
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed
Ratio
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
See
Chart
5
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Sprocket/
Sheave
Hub
Std.
QD
Pulley
Face
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None

Figures
Page 13
December, 11
Fig 407: 180 Degree Curve Bed (Tight Radius)

Components:
Inside
7/16 hex axles.
Notes:
How to Specify:
Nom.
Qty Fig. Width
FPM
407
18
24
30
Section 2:
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
SLA
Tangen
t
Length
Module
M_ _ A
A End Configuration
B End Configuration
M _ _ B
Y
See
N
Chart 6
Drop
Kit
Interm.
Tangent
Length
C
HP
See
Chart
6
See
Chart
3
Slave
Speed
Ratio
See
Chart
4
(Slave
Mods.
Only)
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
See
Chart
5
N/A
Chain
Belt
(M43
ONLY)
Sprocket/
Sheave
Hub
Std.
QD
Pulley
Face
Std.
MC
(M1 &
M3
Series
Only)
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None

Figures
Page 14
December, 11
Fig 408: Straight Bed

Components:
flange x 10 gauge channel
frame with axle isolators*
included.
Rollers: 1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga.
axles.
"A"
End
Module
"A"
"B"
End
Primary
Section
Module
"B"
Orientation
View
Recommended Support
Locations (Approx.) -
(Standard Support)
(Single Leg Support)
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
FPM
408
Section 2:
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
SLA
Drop
Kit
Module
M _ _ A
A End Configuration
Bed
Length
HP
Slave
Speed
Ratio
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
Sprocket/
Sheave
Hub
Pulley
Face
B End Configuration
See
See
See
N/A
Std.
Std.
See
M _ _ B
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chain
QD
MC
Chart
Y
BC
6
3
4
5
Belt
(M1 &
(M43
M3
N
LR
(Slave
ONLY)
Series
LR-6TE
Mods.
Only)
VB
Only)
GV
None

Figures
Page 15
December, 11
Fig 409: Skew Bed

Components:
flange x 10 gauge channel
frame with axle isolators*
included.
Rollers: 1 7/8 dia. x 16 ga.
axles.
("B" End)
Module
"A"
"A"
End
"B"
End
Primary
Section
Module
"B"
("A" End)
Skew 1
Orientation
View
Recommended Support
Locations (Approx.) -
Skew 2)
(Standard Support)
(Single Leg Support)
Notes:
2. Live guard rail must be ordered separately.
3. Skew beds are designed to move product load to either the outside rail or the inside rail.
4. Skew sections may require two beds connected with an M2 series slave to achieve necessary lateral travel.
5. Lateral travel may vary depending upon product condition.
How to Specify:
Qty
Fig.
Nom.
Width
Roller
Center
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
FPM
408
Section 2:
See
Chart
3
Part
Of
SLA
Drop
Kit
Module
M _ _ A
A End Configuration
Bed
Length
HP
Slave
Speed
Ratio
Shaft
Dia.
Drive
Type
Sprocket/
Sheave
Hub
Pulley
Face
B End Configuration
See
See
See
N/A
Std.
Std.
See
M _ _ B
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chain
QD
MC
Chart
Y
BC
6
3
4
5
Belt
(M1 &
(M43
M3
N
LR
(Slave
ONLY)
Series
LR-6TE
Mods.
Only)
VB
Only)
GV
None

Figures
Page 16
December, 11

Section 3:

Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
M11: VB to LR External Slave Drive Module ............................................................................ 3
M12: VB to LR Internal Slave Drive Module.............................................................................. 4
M13: VB to LR Internal Slave Drive Module (1:1 Ratio Only) .................................................. 5
M21: VB to VB External Slave Drive Module ............................................................................ 6
M22: VB to VB Internal Slave Drive Module ............................................................................. 7
M23: VB to VB Internal Slave Drive with Belt Cross-Over Module ......................................... 8
M24: VB to VB Internal Slave Drive with Belt Cross-Over Module (1:1 Ratio Only).............. 9
M31: VB to BC External Slave Drive Module .......................................................................... 10
M41: VB Terminal End-Module ................................................................................................ 11
M42: VB External Drive Terminal End-Module ....................................................................... 12
M43: VB Internal Drive Terminal End-Module ........................................................................ 13
M51: VB 30 Junction-Module ................................................................................................. 14
M52: VB 45 Junction-Module ................................................................................................. 15
M53: VB 30 Junction with Belt Cross-Over-Module ............................................................. 16
M54: VB 45 Junction with Belt Cross-Over-Module ............................................................. 17
M55: VB 30 Junction-with External Drive Module ................................................................ 18
M56: VB 45 Junction-with External Drive Module ................................................................ 19
DK/TEC VB/Live Roller Drop Kit and Terminal End Cover.................................................... 20
TWK: Turning Wheel Kit........................................................................................................... 21
Section 3:

Page 2
December, 11
M11: VB to LR External Slave Drive Module

Description:
Transfers power from a live roller
conveyor to a v-belt conveyor.
Components:
Bed Section:
10 deep x 1-3/8 x 10 ga. steel
channel frame (non-pop out frame
construction).
Includes axle
isolators.
Rollers:
1-7/8 dia. x 16 ga. slaved carrying
rollers. 7/16 hex axles.
Drive:
6 Dia. drive pulley. Includes 1 3/16
or 1-7/16 dia. welded shaft for LR
and a B section v-belt sheave
with 1-3/16 dia. (for VB).
A end shown (B end opposite)
* Right hand device control shown
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assembly includes (1) live roller drop kit.

Available on 2 roller centers only.
This module requires 26 of 8 wide drive belt.
All carrying rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv.
Class
Model
VB
M11
End
Width
A
B
18
24
30
36
42

Pulley
Shaft Dia.
Pulley Face
Slave Ratio
Sprocket
Hub Type
1.1875
1.4375
Std.
MC
See Chart
(4)
Std
QD
Page 3
December, 11
M12: VB to LR Internal Slave Drive Module

Description:
Components:
Bed Section:
channel frame (non-pop out
frame construction).
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
1-7/8 dia. x 16 ga. slaved
carrying rollers. 7/16 hex axles.
Drive:
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6 Dia. drive pulley.

Includes
1 3/16 dia. welded shaft for LR
Assembly includes (1) live roller drop kit

Split taper sprocket is not available on this module.
Available in 2 roller centers only.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv.
Class
Model
VB
M12
End
A
B
Section 3:

Width
Pulley Face
Slave Ratio
18
Std.
See Chart
24
MC
(4)*
30
36
42
*Chart located in Section 1: (VB) V-Belt Driven Live Roller: Application and Technical Data.
Page 4
December, 11
M13: VB to LR Internal Slave Drive Module (1:1 Ratio Only)

Description:
Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drive:
6Dia. drive pulley.
Includes
1 3/16 dia. welded shaft for LR
Assembly includes (1) live roller drop kit

Available in 2 roller centers only.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv.
Class
Model
VB
M13
End
Width
Pulley Face
Slave Ratio
A
B
18
24
30
36
Std.
MC
1:1
1:1:1

Page 5
December, 11
M21: VB to VB External Slave Drive Module

Description:
Transfers power from one v-belt
conveyor to another v-belt
section.
Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
B section v-belt sheave with
1 3/16 dia. (for VB).
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv.
Class
Model
VB
M21
End
Width
Roller Centers
Slave Ratio
Sprocket
Hub Type
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
See Chart
(4)*
Std
QD
*Chart located in Section 1: (VB) V-Belt Driven Live Roller: Application and Technical Data
Section 3:

Page 6
December, 11
M22: VB to VB Internal Slave Drive Module

Description:
section.
Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
1 3/16 dia. (for VB).
Notes:
1. Split taper sprockets are not available on this module.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv.
Class
Model
VB
M22
End
Width
Roller Centers
Slave Ratio
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
See Chart
(4)*
Section 3:

Page 7
December, 11
M23: VB to VB Internal Slave Drive with Belt Cross-Over Module

Description:
section.
Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
1 3/16 dia. (for VB).
Notes:
1. Split taper sprockets are not available on this module.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv.
Class
Model
VB
M23
End
Width
Roller Centers
Slave Ratio
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
See Chart
(4)*
Section 3:

Page 8
December, 11
M24: VB to VB Internal Slave Drive with Belt Cross-Over Module (1:1 Ratio Only)
Description:
section.
Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
1 3/16 dia. (for VB).
Notes:
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv.
Class
Model
VB
M24
End
Width
Roller Centers
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3

Page 9
December, 11
M31: VB to BC External Slave Drive Module

Description:
Transfers power from a belt
conveyor to v-belt conveyor.
Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
6 dia. drive pulley. Includes
(1 3/16, 1-7/16, or 1-11/16 dia.)
welded shaft construction. B
section v-belt sheave with 1-3/16
dia. (for VB).
Notes:
1. Includes (1) pop-out roller at belt transition.
2. Includes 5 belt adjustment.
3. Available speed ratios: (1.2:1, 1.15:1, 1.1:1, 1:1, 1:1.1, 1:1.15, and 1:1.2).
4. Drop kit is not required from BC (Belt Conveyor) to VB.
5. Available on 2 roller centers only.
6. This module requires 27-3/4 of carrying belt
7. Only 12 of this module contains carrying rollers. These rollers contain ABEC-1 precision bearings standard.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv.
Class
Model
VB
M31
End
A
B
Section 3:

Width
Pulley
Shaft Dia.
Pulley Face
Slave Ratio
Sprocket Hub Type
18
1.1875
Std.
See chart
Std.
24
1.4375
MC
(4)*
QD
30
1.6875
36
42
*Chart located in Section 1: (VB) V-Belt Driven Live Roller: Application and Technical Data.
Page 10
December, 11
M41: VB Terminal End-Module

Components:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Notes:
1. Assembly includes 6 PD idler providing 6 of v-belt take-up (3 of take-up travel).
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
M41
Section 3:
End
Width
Roller Centers
Drop Kit
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None

Page 11
December, 11
M42: VB External Drive Terminal End-Module

Description:
Side-mounted direct drive.
Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
1 3/16 dia. shaft. Includes motor
drip pan with (8) zinc plated S
hooks and (4) 6 lengths of zinc
plated No. 4 jack chain.
Notes:
1. 12 Minimum tangent required for true taper curves.
2. 18 Minimum tangent required for tight radius curves.
3. Speeds of 120, 240, and 480 fpm are not available.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
M42
Section 3:
End
Width
Roller Centers
FPM
HP
Sheave Hub Type
Drop Kit
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
See
Chart
(3)*
See
Chart
(3)*
Std.
QD
BC
LR
LR-6TE
VB
GV
None

Page 12
December, 11
M43: VB Internal Drive Terminal End-Module

Description:
Internal mount drive.
Components:
Bed Section:
channel frame with 2 deep spacer
channel (non-pop out frame
construction).
Includes axle
isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:

Notes:
1. 12 Minimum tangent required for true taper curves.
2. 18 Minimum tangent required for tight radius curves.
3. 17 Minimum top of roller dimension due to 2 deep spacer channel.
4. Synchronous belt available as drive train option.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
M43
End
Width
Roller
Centers
FPM
HP
Drive
Train Type
Sprocket
Hub Type
Drop Kit
BC
18
See
See
Chain
Std.
24
Chart
Chart
Belt
QD
(3)*
(3)*
30
LR
LR-6TE
36
VB
42
GV
None
Section 3:

Page 13
February, 12
M51: VB 30 Junction-Module
Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
1 3/16 dia. shaft.
Notes:
1. Junction length dimension referenced above should not be included in overall module length.
2. This module will reduce the maximum tangent available when calculating tangent lengths on figures. Refer to
chart (6) in VB-Section 1: Application and Technical Data.
4. Drop kit is not required when used with AutoSort.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
M51
Section 3:
End
Width
Roller Centers
Junction Face Drop Kit
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
BC
LR
None

Page 14
December, 11
M52: VB 45 Junction-Module
Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
1 3/16 dia. shaft.
Notes:
4. Drop kit for pop-up wheel sorter to be ordered with pop-up divert station.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
M52
Section 3:
End
Width
Roller Centers
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
BC
LR
None

Page 15
December, 11
M53: VB 30 Junction with Belt Cross-Over-Module

Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:

Drive:
1 3/16 dia. shaft.
Notes:
2. Drop kit not required when used with AutoSort.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
M53
Section 3:
End
Width
Roller Centers
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
BC
LR
None

Page 16
December, 11
M54: VB 45 Junction with Belt Cross-Over-Module

Components:
Bed Section:
Includes
axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
1 3/16 dia. shaft.
Notes:
2. Drop kit for pop-up wheel sorter to be ordered with pop-up divert station.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
M54
Section 3:
End
Width
Roller Centers
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
2
3
BC
LR
None

Page 17
December, 11
M55: VB 30 Junction-with External Drive Module

Description:
Side-mount direct drive.
Components:
Bed Section:
10 deep x 1-3/8 x 10 ga. steel channel
frame (non-pop out frame construction).
Includes axle isolators.
Rollers:
1-7/8 dia. x 16 ga. slaved carrying
rollers. 7/16 hex axles.
Drive:
B section v-belt sheave with 1-3/16

dia. shaft. Includes motor drip pan with
(8) zinc plated S hooks and (4) 6
lengths of zinc plated No. 4 jack chain.
Notes:
1. Junction length dimension referenced above is not to be included in the overall module length.
3. Drop Kit not required when used with AutoSort.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
M55
End
Width
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
Roller
Centers
2
3
FPM
HP
See
Chart
(3)*
See
Chart
(3)*
Sheave
Hub Type
Junction Face
Drop Kit
Std.
QD
BC
LR
None
Section 3:

Page 18
December, 11
M56: VB 45 Junction-with External Drive Module

Description:
Side-mount direct drive.
Components:
Bed Section: 10 deep x 1-3/8 x
10 ga. steel channel frame (nonpop out frame construction).
Includes axle isolators.
Rollers:
Drive:
Notes:
1. Junction length dimension referenced above is not to be included in the overall module length.
3. Drop Kit for pop-up wheel sorter to be ordered with the pop-up divert station.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
M56
End
Width
A
B
18
24
30
36
Roller
Centers
2
3
FPM
HP
See
Chart
(3)*
See
Chart
(3)*
Sheave
Hub Type
Junction Face
Drop Kit
Std.
QD
BC
LR
None
Section 3:

Page 19
December, 11
DK/TEC VB/Live Roller Drop Kit and Terminal End Cover

Components:
Drop Kit:
10 or 12 ga. sheet steel.
Terminal End Cover:
Formed 14 ga. sheet steel. Includes
mounting hardware.
Mounting Options:
< Flush:
When
V-Belt
and
connecting
conveyor nominal widths are equal.
Mounting Option: Flush
< Nominal Less 6 (Centered)

When V-Belt and connecting conveyor
nominal widths differ by 6 and mounted
centered along a common centerline.
Mounting Option: Nominal Less 6 (Centered)
< Nominal Less 6 (Offset)

When V-Belt and connecting conveyor
nominal widths differ by 6and mounted
offset, aligning to one side of conveyor.
Mounting Option: Nominal Less 6 (Offset)
Notes:
1. LR-6TE Drop kit is not designed to support load. Floor or ceiling supports are required on each side and must
be ordered separately.
2. Terminal end covers for Nominal Less 6 (Centered) are supplied in pairs: one right and one left hand cover.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Conv. Class
Model
VB
DK/TEC
Section 3:
End
VB Width
Connecting Conv. Drop Kit
Connecting Conv. Width
Terminal End Cover
A
B
18
24
30
36
42
BC
LR
1
LR-6TE
VB
GV
(Junction) BC/LR
None
18
24
30
36
42
Centered
Offset
None

Page 20
December, 11
TWK: Turning Wheel Kit

Components:
Wheel:
6 dia. rubber wheel with slotted
mounting bracket.
Bracket:
12 ga. formed sheet steel brackets.
Notes:
1. Turning wheel is mounted to the live roller conveyor.
How to Specify:
Qty.
Section 3:
Conv. Class
VB

Model
TWK
Page 21
December, 11
Supports and Guard Rail
Section 5:
Supports and Guard Rail:
Page 1
December, 11
Table of Contents:
FS1W: Floor Support (Standard and Extended Range)........................................................... 3
FS2W / FS3W: Floor Support (2 and 3 Wide)............................................................................ 4
FS1TS / FS2TS / FS3TS: Floor Support (1, 2 and 3 Tier Straddle) .......................................... 5
CL: Center Floor Support........................................................................................................... 6
SCB: Swivel Caster Boot ........................................................................................................... 6
SB: Sway Brace Assembly (for Bolted Floor Support)............................................................ 7
10T: 10 Foot Long Truss ............................................................................................................ 8
24DT: 24 Deep Post Truss........................................................................................................ 8
CHP: Ceiling Hanger Pipe .......................................................................................................... 9
SWC: Single Wide Crossover .................................................................................................. 10
DWC: Double Wide Crossover ................................................................................................ 11
TWC: Double Wide Crossover ................................................................................................. 12
Fixed Angle Guard Rail ............................................................................................................ 13
Fixed Z Angle Guard Rail ..................................................................................................... 13
Channel Guard Rail (1) High .................................................................................................... 14
Channel Guard Rail (2) High .................................................................................................... 14
Tube Guard Rail (1) High.......................................................................................................... 15
Tube Guard Rail (2) High.......................................................................................................... 15
45 Flared Guard Rail ............................................................................................................... 16
Channel guard Rail (Welded Construction)............................................................................ 16
Live Guard Rail ......................................................................................................................... 17
GRTG1: Guard Rail Transition Guard 1 .................................................................................. 18
GRTG10: Guard Rail Transition Guard 10 .............................................................................. 23
Section 5:
Page 2
December, 11
FS1W: Floor Support (Standard and Extended Range)

Components:
Leg and Cross Brace:
3 x 1 3/4 x 10 ga. channel
with 10 ga. gusset plates.
Bolted construction.
Technical Data:
Support Widths:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48,
54, 60, 66, 72 and 78
Capacity:
2000 Lbs.
Stand Head Adjustment:
30
Support Height:
No.
Range
No. of
Cross
Braces
No.
Range
No. of
Cross
Braces
No.
Range
68
68
3644
3644
102114
102114
810
810
4250
4250
114126
114126
1012
1012
5058
5058
1214
1214
5664
5664
1418
1418
6270
1826
1826
7078
2230
2230
2836
2836
No. of
Cross
Braces
No.
186198
186198
198210
198210
Range
126138
126138
210222
210222
138150
138150
222234
222234
6270
150162
150162
234246
234246
7078
162174
162174
246258
246258
7890
7890
174186
174186
90102
90102
No. of
Cross
Braces
5
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
Width
Height
FS1W
18
24
30
36
42
Section 5:
48
54
60
66
72
78
21
27
33
39
45
Input number
from height
chart above
Page 3
December, 11
FS2W / FS3W: Floor Support (2 and 3 Wide)

Components:
Bolted construction.
Technical Data:
Support Widths:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48,
54, 60, 66, 72 and 78
Capacity:
FS2W
2000 Lbs.
30
FS3W
Support Height:
No.
Range
1620
1620
2028
2028
2432
2432
3038
3038
FS2W
A
18
24
30
36
18
24
30
B
18
24
30
36
24
30
36
B
18
24
30
18
24
30
FS3W
A
18
24
30
24
30
36
B
18
24
30
18
24
30
Notes:
1. Actual dimension of the conveyor gap will vary from the Nominal Gap depending upon the conveyor class.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 5:
Model
Width (Conv. A)
Width (Conv. B)
Height
FS2W
FS3W
18
24
30
36
18
24
30
36
Input number
from height
chart above
Saddle Support
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
None
Nom. Gap Between Conveyors

1
2
3
5
6
Page 4
December, 11
FS1TS / FS2TS / FS3TS: Floor Support (1, 2 and 3 Tier Straddle)
FS1T
FS2T
FS3T
Components:
Technical Data:

3 x 1 3/4 x 10 ga. channel with 10 ga. gusset plates. Bolted
construction.
Support Widths:
18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 54, 60,
66, 72 and 78
Capacity:
2000 Lbs.
30
Support Height:
Model No.
Height
FS2T-W-36
FS2T-W-48
FS2T-W-60
60
FS2T-W-72
No. of Tiers
Model No.
Height
36
FS2T-W-36
48
FS2T-W-48
FS2T-W-60
60
72
FS2T-W-72
FS2T-W-84
84
FS2T-W-96
96
No. of Tiers
Model No.
Height
36
FS3T-W-48
48
48
FS3T-W-60
60
FS3T-W-72
72
72
FS3T-W-84
84
FS2T-W-84
84
FS3T-W-96
96
FS2T-W-96
96
No. of Tiers
*Key: w = support width
Notes:
1. Minimum height of bottom cross brace is 5.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
Width
FS1T
FS2T
FS3T
18
24
30
36
42
Height
48
54
60
66
72
78
21
27
33
39
45
36
48
60
72
84
a. Available on FS1T and FS2T model only.
Section 5:
Page 5
December, 11
CL: Center Floor Support

Components:
Stand Head
7 1/2"
Leg:
Channel
Stand Head::
4 3/4 x 7 1/2 x 10 ga. steel.
Height
Range
Technical Data:
Capacity:
1000 Lbs.
Boot

30
Support Height:
No.
68
810
1012
Range
6-8
8-10
10-12
No.
1214
1418
1826
Range
12-14
14-18
18-26
No.
2230
2836
3644
Range
22-30
28-36
36-44
No.
4250
5058
5664
Range
42-50
50-58
56-64
No.
6270
7078
Range
62-70
70-78
Notes:
1. Floor supports, Nos. 68 1214, use a boot / upright assy. in lieu of a channel and boot assy.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
Height
CL
Input number
from height
chart above
SCB: Swivel Caster Boot

Components:
Caster Boot:
10 ga. steel channel with 10
ga. gusset plates.
Stand Head::
4 3/4 x 7 1/2 x 10 ga. steel.
Technical Data:
Capacity:
300 Lbs.
Notes:
1. Swivel Caster Boot to replace standard support boot.
2. Swivel Caster Boot adds 5 to height of support
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
SCB
Section 5:
Page 6
December, 11
SB: Sway Brace Assembly (for Bolted Floor Support)

Components:
SWAY BRACE
Sway Brace Bar:
SWAY BRACE HEAD
1/4 x 1 5/8 steel bar.
LENGTH
Sway Brace Head::

1 1/8 x 1 5/8 x 10 ga. steel
angle.
BOLTED FLOOR
SUPPORT (REF.)
MOUNTING BRACKET
Mounting Bracket:
1 3/4 x 1 5/8 x 7 lg. x 10
ga. steel angle.
Notes:
1. For use on bolted construction supports only.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 5:
Model
Option
SUPB
SB
Length
Support Type
12
18
24
36
GV
BC
LR
VB
Page 7
December, 11
10T: 10 Foot Long Truss
Notes:
1. When used with Live
Roller (LR) conveyor,
truss requires spacers to
stand it off from cross
channels.
Components:
Truss:
1 3/8 x 6 12 ga, formed sheet steel.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, and 36.
Capacity:
1000 Lbs.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
Width
10T
18
24
30
36
24DT: 24 Deep Post Truss

12' 0"
12' 0"
12' 0"
POST TRUSS ASSEMBLY
TRUSS
ANCHOR
FRAME
JAW AND JAW

TURNBUCKLE
ASSEMBLY
Components:
Post Truss Assy.:
4 x 24 x 12 ga. formed sheet steel upright channel, 12 ga. formed sheet
steel channel cross-tie.
Truss Anchor:
1 3/4 x 4 x 12 ga. formed sheet steel crossmember, 7 ga. steel plate.
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30, and 36.
Capacity:
2000 Lbs.
Jaw and Jaw Turnbuckle:

1/2 x 6 jaw and jaw turnbuckle, 1/2-13 thread rod.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
Width
24DT
18
24
30
36
Section 5:
Page 8
December, 11
CHP: Ceiling Hanger Pipe

NOM. CONVEYOR WIDTH + 9"
1/2-13 THREADED ROD
DROP OR ANGLE DROP
(BY OTHERS)
SADDLE SUPPORT
(OPTIONAL)
Components:
Support Member:
2 dia. x 11 ga. tubing.
Technical Data:
Conveyor Widths (O.A.W.):
18, 24, 30 and 36
Capacity`
2000 Lbs.
NOM. CONVEYOR WIDTH - 3/4"
Notes:
1. Widths 42 thru 78 are for use with alignment and merge beds.
2. Saddle supports allows for the easy removal of terminal end covers.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
Width
CHP
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
66
78
Section 5:
Page 9
December, 11
SWC: Single Wide Crossover

Components:
Upright Legs and Handrails:
1 5/8 x 1 5/8 steel strut.
HANDRAIL
Cross Tie Channel:

1 3/4 x 2 1/2 x 10 ga.
formed sheet steel.
42" REF.
UPRIGHTS
11"
WIDTH
11"
Technical Data:
CROSS TIE
CHANNEL
NOM. CONVEYOR
WIDTH (+) 22 1/4

18, 24, 30 and 36
TOP STEP
HEIGHT
Capacity:
500 Lbs.
7 3/4" REF.
Side View: Step Style Shown.
30"
TOP STEP
Front View: Step Style Shown.
Notes:
1. Single wide crossover is not O.S.H.A. approved.
2. Maximum top step height is 48.
3. When used with a V-Belt (VB) conveyor, no tread plates are supplied.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
Conv. Class
Style
Top Step Height
Width
Roller Centers
12 48
(2 Increments)
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
N/A
SWC
BC
GV
LR
VB
Section 5:
1 - Step
2 - Ladder
Page 10
December, 11
DWC: Double Wide Crossover

Components:
HANDRAIL
UPRIGHTS
11"
CONV.
"A"
WIDTH
CONV.
"B"
WIDTH
Cross Tie Channel:

1 3/4 x 2 1/2 x 10 ga.
formed sheet steel.
42" REF.
11"
GAP
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
TOP STEP
HEIGHT
CROSS TIE
CHANNEL
OVERALL CONVEYOR
WIDTH (+) 22 1/4"
Capacity:
500 Lbs.
7 3/4" REF.
30"
TOP STEP
Front View. Step Style Shown.
Notes:
1. Double wide crossover is not O.S.H.A. approved.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
Conv.
Class
Style
Top Step
Height
Width
(Conv. A)
Gap Between
(A & B)
18
24
30
36
2 24
Width
(Conv. B)
Roller
Centers
18
24
30
36
2
3
4
DWC
BC
GV
LR
VB
1 -Step
2 -Ladder
12 48
a. 2 Increments
b. 1 Increments
Section 5:
Page 11
December, 11
TWC: Double Wide Crossover

Components:
UPRIGHTS

HANDRAIL
11"
CONV.
"A"
WIDTH
CONV.
"B"
WIDTH
CONV.
"C"
WIDTH
GAP
Cross Tie Channel:

1 3/4 x 2 1/2 x 10 ga.
formed sheet steel.
42" REF.
11"
GAP
Technical Data:
18, 24, 30 and 36
TOP STEP
HEIGHT
CROSS TIE
CHANNEL
Capacity:
500 Lbs.
OVERALL CONVEYOR
WIDTH (+) 22 1/4"
7 3/4" REF.
30"
TOP STEP
Front View. Step Style Shown.
Notes:
4. Triple wide crossover is not O.S.H.A. approved.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Model
Conv.
Class
Style
Top Step
Height
Width
(Conv. A)
Gap
Between
(A & B)
Width
(Conv. B)
Gap
Between
(B & C)
Width
(Conv. C)
Roller
Centers
TWC
BC
GV
LR
VB
Section 5:
1 -Step
2 -Ladder
12 48
18
24
30
36
2 24
18
24
30
36
2 24
18
2
24
3
30
4
36
a. 2 Increments
b. 1 Increments
Page 12
December, 11
Fixed Angle Guard Rail

Components:
Angle:
Technical Data:
Heights1:
1 1/2, 3, 62 and 122
Lengths:
13 to 145 in 12 increments.
Mounts:
3 High Guard Rail Shown on Live Roller Conveyor.
Notes:
Variations:
1. 1 1/2 and 3 high fixed guard rail is
available on all conveyor classes.
However, mounting methods will vary.
2. 6 and 12 high fixed guard rail is for
use on Belt Conveyor only. Fixed Z
guard rail (below) is typically used
when fixed guard rail 6 is required.
Top Mount (AR)
Top and bottom of flange

(shown).
Photo
Eye
Hold
Down
Strip
Side Mount (BC)
Photo Eye
(LR) w/Air Brake
Fixed Z Angle Guard Rail

Components:
Angle:
Technical Data:
Heights:
6 1/2 and 12
Lengths:
13 to 145 in 12 increments.
Mounts:
6 1/2 High Guard Rail Shown on Live Roller Conveyor.
Notes:
1. Available on all conveyor classes. Mounting methods will vary per
conveyor type.
Top, side and bottom of flange

(shown)
Variations:
Top Mount (AR)
Section 5:
Page 13
December, 11
Channel Guard Rail (1) High

Guard Rail
Adjustable Channel
Components:
Guard Rail Adjustable Channel (GRAC)
2: high x 1 3/8 wide, 13 ga. steel coil.
Guard Rail Clip

Guard Rail Rod
Guard Rail Clip (GRC):

2 1/2 x 1 5/8 x 11 ga. steel.
Guard Rail Rod (GRR):
5/8 steel round.
Guard Rail Mounting Angle

Guard Rail Splice
Channel (Ref.)
Guard Rail Mounting Angle:

Varies with conveyor class.
Guard Rail Splice Channel: (GRSC)
12 ga. formed steel.
Notes:
Variations:
Photo Eye
conveyor type.
2. A Guard Rail Splice Bar (GRSB) is used to splice together channel guard
rail when there is a change in elevation.
Saddle Support
Photo Eye conveyor (Live Shaft shown)
Channel Guard Rail (2) High

Guard Rail
Adjustable Channel
Guard Rail Clip
Guard Rail Rod
Components:
Guard Rail Adjustable Channel (GRAC)
2: high x 1 3/8 wide, 13 ga. steel coil.
2 1/2 x 1 5/8 x 11 ga. steel.
5/8 steel round.
Guard Rail
Mounting Angle
Guard Rail Splice Channel (Ref.)
Guard rail shown on Motor Driven Roller AutoRoll conveyor.

Guard Rail Splice Channel: (GRSC)
12 ga. formed steel.
Notes:
conveyor type.
2. A Guard Rail Splice Bar (GRSB) is used to splice together channel guard
rail when there is a change in elevation.
3. A Guard Rail Extension Plate (GREP) can be used in special situations
to enable the guard rail to extend over the carrying surface.
Variations:
Photo
Eye
P.E. conveyor
Section 5:
Extension
Plate
GREP
Page 14
December, 11
Tube Guard Rail (1) High

Guard Rail Adjustable Tube
Guard Rail
Tube Clip
Guard Rail
Tube Splice
(Ref.)
Components:
Guard Rail Adjustable Tube (GRAT)
1 3/8 dia. x 18 ga. steel tube.
Guard Rail Tube Clip (GRTC):
Stamped 7 ga. steel.
Guard Rail Rod
5/8 steel round.

Guard Rail
Mounting Angle
Notes:
1. Available on all conveyor classes.
conveyor type.
Guard Rail Adjustable Tube Splice:

(GRATS)
1 3/8 dia. PVC rod x 4 5/8 Lg.
Variations:
Mounting methods will vary per
Photo Eye
Saddle Support
Photo Eye conveyor
Tube Guard Rail (2) High

Guard Rail Adjustable Tube
Guard Rail Tube Clip
Components:
Guard Rail Adjustable Tube (GRAT)
1 3/8 dia. x 18 ga. steel tube.
Guard Rail
Tube Splice
(Ref.)
Guard Rail Tube Clip (GRTC):

Stamped 7 ga. steel.
5/8 steel round.
Guard Rail Rod

Guard Rail Mounting Angle
Guard rail shown on Motor Driven Roller AutoRoll conveyor.

Guard Rail Adjustable Tube Splice:
(GRATS)
1 3/8 dia. PVC rod x 4 5/8 Lg.
Notes:
conveyor type.
2. A Tube Guard Rail Extension Rod Weldment can be used in special
situations to enable the guard rail to extend over the carrying surface.
Variations:
Tube Extention
Photo
Eye
P.E. conveyor
Section 5:
Extension Rod
Page 15
December, 11
45 Flared Guard Rail

Components:
Guard Rail:
Technical Data:
Lengths:
36 144 in 36 increments.
Height:
4
Guard Rail Shown on Trash Conveyor.
Notes:
1. This guard rail to be used with the belt conveyor (BC) class, trash application only.
Channel guard Rail (Welded Construction)

Channel
Components:
Guard Rail:
End Plates:
End plate
12 ga. sheet steel.

Technical Data:
Lengths:
Height:
6, 12, 18 and 24.
6 High Guard Rail Shown on Trash Conveyor.
Notes:
1. This guard rail to be used with the belt conveyor (BC) class, trash application only.
Section 5:
Page 16
December, 11
Live Guard Rail

Components:
Live Guard Rail:
Skatewheel
Guard Rail Rod (Ref.)
2 7/8 x 7/8 high x 12 ga.

steel angle.
Skatewheel:
1 5/16 dia.
Guard Rail Clip (Ref.)

2 1/2 x 1 5/8 11 ga. steel.
Live Guard Rail

5/8 dia. steel round.
Technical Data:
Lengths:
Live Guard rail shown on Motor Driven Roller AutoRoll merge table bed.
Notes:
1. Live guard rail is for use on merge tables, alignment tables, skew beds and anywhere reduced friction
between cartons and guard rail is desired.
Section 5:
Page 17
December, 11
GRTG1: Guard Rail Transition Guard 1

19"
13/16"
HEIGHT
HEIGHT + 1 7/16"
14 GA.
4" TERMINAL
END (REF.)
LIVE ROLLER CONVEYOR (REF.)
Notes:
1. For use with Belt Conveyor Only
2. Conveyor width is not applicable.
3. Includes all required mounting hardware.
Description:
Provides a straight guard rail

transition across a belt conveyor
terminal end (4, 5 or 6 pulley) to a
live roller conveyor.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG1
Height
Side
1 1/2
3
6
12
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both

22 1/2
13/16
HEIGHT + 1 7/16"
HEIGHT
14 GA.
LIVE ROLLER
CONVEYOR (REF.)
8" END DRIVE (REF.)
Notes:
Description:
Provides a straight guard rail

transition across a belt conveyor
terminal end (8 pulley or 5/5 rigid
slave) to a live roller conveyor.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 5:
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG2
Height
Side
1 1/2
3
6
12
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both
Page 18
December, 11
15/16"
HEIGHT + 1 7/8"
14 GA.
POWER FEEDER
FIGURE
HEIGHT
INCLINE
CONVEYOR
(REF.)
LIVE ROLLER CONVEYOR (REF.)
POWER FEEDER
Notes:
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 5:
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG3
Description:
Provides a guard rail transition over

a belt conveyor power feeder.
Height
Side
3
6
12
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both
Power Feeder / Nom. Width

PF1 / 30
PF1 / 36
PF2 /18
PF2 / 24
PF2 / 30
PF2 / 36
Page 19
December, 11
31" OR 27" (SEE BELOW)
13/16"
HEIGHT + 1 15/32"
14 GA.
27"
31"
25 REF.
TC
TC
TC
HEIGHT
3 PULLEY BELT
TRACKING UNIT
Notes:
Description:

a belt conveyor adjustable 3-pulley
splice assembly.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG4
Height
3
6
12
Section 5:
Side
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both
Page 20
December, 11

13 1/4"
13/16"
HEIGHT
HEIGHT + 1 7/16"
14 GA.
BELT CONVEYOR
NOSEOVER SPLICE
SHOWN AT 15
Notes:
How to Specify:
Quantity
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG5
Description:

a belt conveyor nose over splice.
Height
3
6
12
Side
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both

13/16"
HEIGHT + 1 7/16"
14 GA.
HEIGHT
LIVE ROLLER CONVEYOR

6" NOSEOVER TERMINAL END (SHOWN)
Notes:
Description:

a belt conveyor nose over terminal
end (6NTE, 8NTE, 6NDE, and
8NDE).
How to Specify:
Quantity
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG6
Height
6
12
Section 5:
Side
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both
Page 21
December, 11

14 GA.
STRAIGHT TRASH
GUARD RAIL
1 3/8"
HEIGHT - 1/2"
HEIGHT
6"
TRASH CONVEYOR BED
TERMINAL END
Notes:
Description:
Provides a guard rail transition on or

off a trash conveyor terminal end
assembly.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG7
Height
3
6
12
Side
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both
Notes:
Description:
Provides a guard rail transition on or

off a trash conveyor terminal end
assembly.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG8
Side
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both
Section 5:
Page 22
December, 11

NOMINAL
WIDTH - 1/8"
STRAIGHT TRASH
GUARD RAIL
1 3/8"
HEIGHT - 1/2"
END TIE CHANNEL
HEIGHT
14 GA.
1/2" BELT
CLEARANCE
TERMINAL END
TRASH CONVEYOR
Notes:
2. Includes one trash guard end tie channel and all required
mounting hardware.
NOMINAL WIDTH
Description:
Used to tie together channel guard

rail at the infeed end of a trash
conveyor.
How to Specify:
Quantity
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG9
Width
Height
Side
18
24
30
36
42
48
6
12
18
24
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both

STRAIGHT TRASH GUARD RAIL
HEIGHT
14 GA.
36"
1 3/8"
TRASH
CONVEYOR
BED
Notes:
How to Specify:
Quantity
Section 5:
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG10
Description:
Provides a guard rail transition to or

from a taller trash guard rail.
Height
Side
6
12
18
24
R - Right
L - Left
B - Both
Page 23
December, 11

Description:
NOMINAL
WIDTH
Provides a guard rail transition

to or from a taller trash guard
rail.
30
6 19/32" REF.
4"
14 GA.
STRAIGHT TRASH
GUARD RAIL
GUARD EXTENSION
HEIGHT
12" REF.
AS REQ'D
AT DUMP
3" MIN. REF.

LOCATION OF
TE PULLEY
TRASH
CONVEYOR BED
1 1/2"
STRIPPER PLATE
12" REF.
TRASH CONVEYOR BED
Notes:
How to Specify:
Quantity
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG11
Width
18
24
30
36
42
48
Section 5:
Page 24
December, 11

Description:
1 3/8"
14 GA.
Provides a guard rail transition

from a fixed flared channel
guard rail to a fixed channel
guard rail.
HEIGHT
NOMINAL
CONVEYOR
WIDTH - 2 7/8"
45 FLARED TRASH
GUARD RAIL
STRAIGHT
TRASH
GUARD RAIL
36"
4" REF.
NOM. WIDTH
1 21/32" REF.
TRASH CONVEYOR BED
Notes:
How to Specify:
Quantity
Conv. Class
Model
BC
GRTG12
Height
6
12
18
24
Section 5:
Page 25
December, 11

636199106269154884

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

636199106269154884

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Order Specification Manual

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Sub-Classes of Gravity Conveyor: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

Roller Gravity Conveyor (RG) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Elevation Changes (Decline Only)

Product Storage and Queuing (Order Picking)

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Sub-Classes of Gravity Conveyor:

Roller Gravity Straight Conveyor

Roller Gravity Flow Rail

Sub-Class 2: Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (GW)

Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (single row)

Gravity Wheel Flow Rail (double row)

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Sub-Class 3: Gravity Ball Transfer Tables (GB)

Sub-Class 4: Gravity Slides & Chutes (GS)

ENTRY TRANSITION PLATE

Gravity Trough Chute

Slide to Roller Gravity Connection

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Minimum Product Length:

Minimum Top of Roller:

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Horizontal/ Decline Operation: Gravity Conveyor is designed to operate as a horizontal conveyor or as

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Chart : Gravity Pitch Selection

Product Being Conveyed

Gravity Roller Conv.

Gravity Roller Conv.

Gravity Wheel Conv.

Pitch Per Ft.

Pitch Per 10-0 Section

Pitch Per 90 Curve

Carton (Fiber Smooth Bottom)

Carton (Fiber Smooth Bottom)

Carton (Fiber Smooth Bottom)

Carton (Fiber Smooth Bottom)

Wood Cases or Boxes

Wood Cases or Boxes

Wood Cases or Boxes

Wood Cases or Boxes

Wood Cases or Boxes

Metal & Fiber Glass Tote

Metal & Fiber Glass Tote

Metal & Fiber Glass Tote

Multi-Wall Bags (Firm)

Multi-Wall Bags (Firm)

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Fig 101: 30 Degree True Taper Gravity Curve

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Gap Roller Kit

Fig 102: 45 Degree True Taper Gravity Curve

NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH + 1 4"

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Gap Roller Kit

Fig 103: 60 Degree True Taper Gravity Curve

NOMINAL CONVEYOR WIDTH + 1 4"

(GV) Gravity Conveyor:

Gap Roller Kit